368 24 26018 https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/065f77e4035a01e18f0a9b6f308e1a58.jpg 03295695bca73c7646458b505e86b98c Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrimesThomas Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grimes, Thomas Description An account of the resource Thomas Grimes Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/9db65da6f9fe6fb80213f95ebec4ed48.jpg 1b54a796768537ea72ce565d20279eab Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrimmLucille Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grimm, Lucille Description An account of the resource Lucille Grimm, Nursing Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College teachers Universities and colleges – Faculty Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/3e4fb112c91d1eb7bbeccfee0697fa56.jpg 421f3373d4c7b9455060f15a15f6a76b Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrinsteadLinda Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grinstead, Linda Description An account of the resource Linda Grinstead Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/7320e5f7374b9f3058d7838f6defcd43.jpg b8a9439d59de70993b27737ad69fb0e7 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrischkePaul_Photo01 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grischke, Paul Description An account of the resource Paul Grischke, Music Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College teachers Universities and colleges – Faculty Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/4e04ddc967004670af58f43b02c15c2b.jpg 1749b678efe619f3b733df093aa4f8c3 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrischkePaul_Photo02 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grischke, Paul Description An account of the resource Paul Grischke, Music Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College teachers Universities and colleges – Faculty Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/68ccf72f3abb5998c26f1b721b965078.jpg f98e7aad532825557d2dd1fe10e7dc31 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrischkePaul_Photo03 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1976 Title A name given to the resource Grischke, Paul Description An account of the resource Paul Grischke, Music Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College teachers Universities and colleges – Faculty Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng 1976s https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/ed8e011465e5fd21e1305cf3f1d6e3e8.jpg c3cbf4558dd49b7a9dded9eb4e965f77 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrischkePaul_Photo04 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grischke, Paul Description An account of the resource Paul Grischke, Music Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College teachers Universities and colleges – Faculty Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/19d62439ce950adfa373ba357a48845f.m4v d553df72c794f75b1ef4eca437ab548b https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/fd2a2533f572e042e0e06a5cf2ef6787.pdf 6a8aa027e4585531fa2803c9366deece PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veteran’s History Project World War II Jake Grit Length of Interview (01:19:16) Background (00:00:16) Born in Grand Rapids, MI; March 16, 1923 Father was a cabinet makers; wasn’t able to keep his job through The Depression Lost the farm during that time Christian High School, graduated 1941 Wasn’t worried about what was going on in Europe, more focused on sports Had a job in the furniture factory, then a railroad job Service (00:02:42) Drafted into the Army on March 1943, on his birthday  Didn’t consider enlisting before because he wanted to help out his family (00:03:40) Reported to Allegan County (00:04:08)  Told him when he would report and was sent to Camp Grant  Given a uniform in Camp Grant Sent to Camp Butner, North Carolina for basic training (00:04:48)  Learned how to be a soldier  Regular Army training; learn to follow orders and march  Did well with the training; was able to follow orders well  Not many men got in trouble, good crew of men from all over the country  Did AIT, as well; there for a few months  Always with the same group of men Would get passes into town (00:07:29) � Close to Raleigh, North Carolina; would visit places, eat food Regular Army Training- combat training (00:08:12)  Trained with a rifle and .30 caliber machine guns  Stayed in the camp for a long time, was in the 78th Division  When going overseas, transferred to 9th Division Was a PFC when leaving North Carolina (00:10:13) Europe (00:10:37) Shipped out and sent overseas, sailed out of Boston  Kaiser Victor Ship  Sailed in a convoy, zigzag across  Some ships in the convoy took submarine damage  Sub emergency drills- had to go onto your bunk, stay out of the way and off deck Very stormy weather in Northern part of the ocean, a lot of people were sick (00:12:33)  One staff sergeant was sick the whole way Took about 14 days, landed in Moscow (00:13:08) Shipped down to somewhere in Wales; went as a Replacement (in 9th Division), designated this when leaving the United States (00:13:27) Joined the Army in ’43 and had been in training for about a year (00:15:00) The invasion of Europe happened after Grit arrived; watched fighter and bomber planes fly overhead (00:15:12) Grit had to get his teeth filled before going into combat (00:16:12)  Joined his unit in the 9th Division on September 6, 1944 Crossed the Channel in a British boat, got on landing craft and landed on Omaha Beach (00:16:43)  Saw what was left of German houses and bunkers (00:17:38) �Crossed France in an Army truck, picked up from the beach after landing (00:18:06) First action happed two days after joining the 9th Division, September 8 (00:19:25)  Was in the front lines  Can’t remember it very well After getting across France, was in the “War Zone” (00:21:02)  When Grit arrived to his company had about twenty other men, at most, who were there as replacements  Sergeant gave orders and Grit had to follow them  Most men usually didn’t talk to replacement soldiers because they believed they would get killed right away (00:22:29)  Grit wasn’t given much advice about combat; some men gave advice though, usually his Sergeant did this  Told to keep your head down and follow the Sergeant’s orders because they had to work together  Did connect with the other men eventually Battle of Hurtgen Forest (00:24:40) Was in the Battle of Hurtgen Forest  One of the worst battles his company ever had  Was in a thick fir tree forest, very dark  Had fire lanes in there which the enemy watched closely; tanks and guns  The enemy used a lot of artillery  Had to be careful and quick to get into a foxhole or out of sight  Made foxholes at night so they couldn’t be seen Was a rifleman during this time, only a PFC (00:27:10) Became a Sergeant not long after because of numerous casualties (00:27:28) � Wasn’t the easiest job  In charge of a squad of 12 or 15 men; sometimes smaller, 3 or 4  New men almost every day, did his best to prepare them  “Keep your head down.” During the Battle of Hurtgen Forest, had food brought up by crews from the kitchen gang (00:29:20)  Given C and K-rations  Always kept fresh water in his canteen Was cold there, had trouble with Trench Foot  The moisture froze in the foxholes The Hurtgen Forest was a hard fight for both sides (00:31:48)  Hard to see the enemy in the forest  Saw the body of a dead German Officer, no one moved him for fear of getting shot Was pulled out of the line and into the Reserve Area for a while until a replacement came (00:33:20) Battle of the Bulge (00:34:38) Went into the Battle of the Bulge with the 9th Division, came in at the North end of the Bulge  99th Division replaced them and were hit hard  Saw German soldiers using an American jeep to go into town, was the 99th Division’s  Were using it because they had it, no subterfuge 9th Division was mostly in defensive positions during December ’44 and January ‘45 (00:37:05)  Stayed in the front but then the whole unit was moved back  Had to camp outside during this time, many men got frostbite and trench foot because it was so cold  Given canned heat, Grit kept his socks dry � Told his men to do this, as well The men’s morale was low, always complaining (00:38:47) Often saw American artillery observation planes overhead (00:39:07)  Sometimes saw a few patrols of bombers and fighters  Didn’t get support from the Air Force often, the Colonel had to call in to get support  Saw Thunderbolts (P-47’s) dive bomb during combat; didn’t use rockets, used 500lb. bombs Remagen Bridge (00:41:18) Early 1945, Grit’s unit moved toward Remagen Bridge  31 mile march  Bridge was riddled with holes, crossed on the bridge  Did this during the cover of night  Unit crossed it in the period of one day  Fought hard to keep from being pushed back  Mostly fought enemy infantry and some tanks, a lot of artillery  Felt like they were being shoved back, had to stand and fight  Got some support, just infantry  The fight lasted about a couple days, hold position at nights After securing the position, they kept moving forward into Germany (00:43:47)  Half the time wasn’t sure if he was in Belgium or Germany Didn’t see many civilians; when put in reserve, saw more but wasn’t allowed to speak to them (00:44:55) After American troops crossed the Remagen Bridge, the German soldiers fought harder; the closer they got to Germany, the harder the enemy fought (00:45:38) Doesn’t remember where he went after crossing at Remagen �April of ’45, saw a German airplane crash near Grit’s position (00:46:43)  Ran over to see what happened  The lieutenant Grit was with took the dead pilot's jacket “More fighting to do” (00:47:51) 1945, was hiding in a house from the Germans  Hid 14 of his men in a house for 12 hours  Was in a barn and could see German soldiers through the knocked-out tile of its roof  The Germans eventually left  The 47th Regiment of his divisin came and they joined them After joining them, Grit and his men had more fighting to do (00:50:00)  Went to the next town and found no enemy soldiers  Became more and more common that German soldiers evacuated the towns before American troops arrived  Grit felt that they were afraid of the Americans, afraid of being shot After a while, the enemy soldiers knew they wouldn’t be shot, surrendered peacefully (00:51:35) Had to stop some Russian soldiers from crossing American lines with a truck (00:52:05)  Shot the front tires off  Had a man in his unit who could speak Russian and spoke with them  Told them to go back to their own lines and they did When the war had ended, Grit’s troop had been at a city in Germany (00:53:30) Grit never saw the war or concentration camps (00:54:05)  Went through Nordhausen where he saw pits filled with the dead  All hadn’t even been covered up, bodies were just thrown in �Occupation (00:55:07) Was in the Occupation for six months after the War ended  Acted as an American Police Force  Had men and three jeeps under his command that patrolled counties of Taffenhoffen, Germany  The countryside was similar to America, a lot of farms  No fraternization allowed Policing similar to that in America, protected the civilians and made sure no one got hurt (00:56:20)  Germans didn’t cause any trouble for Grit Had a point system and couldn’t wait to go home (00:57:00)  Grit didn’t have much time in the Army, so his points were really low; had to wait a little while Got out of the Germany after he got all of his points (00:57:42)  Discharged January of ’46, so probably got home late ‘45 Battle of the Bulge Injury (00:58:11) Was in the Battle of the Bulge, and a mortar shell hit ahead of him  The shell was designed to give men concussions, no shrapnel  Blew him against a tree  Caused him to get a Purple Heart  Out of action for three days  Was brought back to a mess tent so they waited for him to awake and rest  Medics didn’t do much with him because he had no shrapnel wounds  His back and leg were injured  Was given the job of calling in the mortar fire � Didn’t have to walk, carried the car beam Used a walkie-talkie to call in the mortar fire (01:03:00)  Worked about less than a mile ahead of the mortar crew  Gave them the range  Had to go ahead of the line for observations  A very dangerous job  Germans tried to pick up on his radio’s signal to block it  Did this for the rest of the War  Never got hit and kept his calls short as possible  Confirmed hits and the situation  Called in the crew when there were enemy machine guns  Could see if the shells would land When Grit saw the 99th Division come in, brand new soldiers that came to relieve his unit (01:07:08)  A lieutenant had wanted to bring in his bedroll into combat and Grit told him not to  The man did listen because he couldn’t fit his bedroll in the foxhole Stories/Extra (01:10:20) Was in a town where Grit butchered a chicken so his unit could eat it, the woman who owned the rooster was very mad and started yelling at them in German  First time they had fresh meat since leaving the U.S. Depended on the action to gauge whether they lost a lot of men or not (01:11:55) Near the end of the War, everything slowed down; less casualties and actions (01:12:45) He was the oldest man in the company, had more experience than a lot of the officers (01:13:03) �Going Home (01:13:40) Took him, and many other men with the same number of points as he, and took them in trucks to Omaha Beach, shipped back to England, then back to the U.S.  Went in a better ship than when he came to Europe, was in a regular transport ship  Was a faster boat, as well Landed in New York, could see the Statue of Liberty (01:16:06)  Not sure where he went after  Headed straight home after being discharged from Camp Atterbury, Indiana  Took a bus home Didn’t take a job right away, rested for a while (01:17:00)  Went back to the railroad he left, asked to become a mechanic  Ended up a foreman in the mechanical department, specialized in airbricks Learned discipline, how to discipline others, and how to give and take orders; learned quite a bit (01:18:30) � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Grit, Jacob (Interview outline and video), 2009 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grit, Jake Description An account of the resource Jake Grit was drafted into the Army in 1943 and fought in World War II. He served in a rifle company in the 9th Division, which he joined as a replacement in September, 1944. He saw action in the Hurtgen Forest, the Battle of the Bulge, at the Remagen Bridge, and in the advance into Germany. Despite the intensity of some of his combat experiences, he did not have enough points to go home right away, and spent several months with the Army of Occupation in Germany. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Michigan--History, Military Veterans Video recordings World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American United States. Army Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2009-09-22 Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GritJ Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/0971d13bd3ec494cac3477cbd35bddcb.jpg 110f558b9ead44031d4be5a1c984276b Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroganTom_Photo01 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1980 Title A name given to the resource Grogan, Tom Description An account of the resource Tom Grogan, Food Service Director Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College administrators Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng 1980s https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/c1b329ce28322a3a051b6f6896f099c0.jpg c28fa350c1e21c0bbb8d84605b5fb62d Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Faces of Grand Valley Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource University Communications Description An account of the resource A non-comprehensive collection of photographs of Grand Valley faculty, staff, administrators, board members, friends, and alumni. Photos collected by University Communications for use in promotion and information sharing about Grand Valley with the wider community. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960s - 1990s Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived GV012-03. University Communications. Vita Files Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copryight Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University College administrators College teachers Colleges and universities -- Faculty Michigan Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-03 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource eng Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroganTom_Photo02 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. University Communications Title A name given to the resource Grogan, Tom Description An account of the resource Tom Grogan, Food Service Director Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University – History College administrators Michigan Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived University Communications. Vita Files, 1968-2016 (GV012-03) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. Special Collections and University Archives Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Language A language of the resource eng https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/77c1a4415dcf73fb30ef51bba7fae8d3.mp4 c400e4e9b43f4c5294a42f00c8fdf194 https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/54448aa218121c8a6a179ba4846d3539.pdf 0bf3a6efb1a0a5184871432d5453a2a7 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veteran’s History Project World War II Richard William Groggel Length of Interview (00:43:33) Background and Training (00:00:00) Born July 22, 1924 Served in WWII, France and Germany 1st Lieutenant, highest rank achieved Wanted to join the Marines with four of his buddies, but found out that he was color blind Took one semester of college at Western Michigan in Kalamazoo (then called Western Teachers’ College) Called into Service, went to Camp Grant, Illinois for Induction (00:01:25) Then went to Texas for Basic Training and Anti-aircraft Sent to North Carolina for Officers’ Candidate School  Groggel’s instructors called him a “90-day Wonder,” reserved a 2nd Lieutenant commission Went back to Texas for Anti-aircraft Training with a battery of officers  Training in anti-aircraft automatic weaponry  40 millimeter machine guns Went to Fort Benning, Georgia for eight weeks to train as an Infantry Officer Shipped to Camp Roberts, California, to train troops; 16-week training  Got fed up with the trainees  Wanted to enlist somewhere else �France and Germany: 90th Infantry Division Before this happened, had orders to go overseas; went to Fort Meade, Maryland (00:03:35) Shipped over to Liverpool, England; stayed for a couple weeks Crossed the English Chanel over to France Joined the 90th Infantry Division as a Replacement Officer; 359th Infantry, 3rd Battalion, KCompany, 2nd Platoon (00:04:05) They had just crossed the Moselle River when Groggel was shipped in; very tough battle, had a 110% turnover Groggel was given charge of the 2nd Platoon; no men left, was given 20 men, supposed to have 48 His Platoon worked their way to the Saar River, crossed there in engineering boats (00:05:02)  It had flooded, so they had to wade most of the way across Groggel was sent out into the Siegfried Line, a man from another Company took his Platoon out at night  Strung up phone lines  His Platoon was replacing another, in a German Pillbox  Artillery fire caused them to lose communication with their Company Next morning, found a three-story Pillbox  Went down a ramp to the entrance; had beds and food on the base floor  2nd Floor, had sliding-door entrances  3rd Floor, a tower with a periscope and four or five doors that opened and allowed the machine gun to fire  Germans would always attempt to shoot the periscope out  The Germans landed on the top of the tower one night and smashed the periscope  Whenever Groggel’s Platoon heard someone outside, would throw out fragmentation grenades; could hear when someone was hit � Threw a few German Concussion Grenades if they weren’t sure someone was coming; these grenades had varying fuses The next morning, had a BAR Team (Browning Automatic Rifle) stationed at the two sliding door entrances; pulled those men out from that level for a break (00:08:02) The Germans blew those doors out; thankfully no one was hurt His Squad leader, whom had a German background (Schwarz), attempted to use a porthole to fire a machine gun Germans fired and a piece of shrapnel hit Groggel’s Sergeant’s cheek The Groggel’s men thought they would surrender On the way up (from Moselle River), had lost their Platoon Leader, who was from D-day  The Platoon Leader had been injured, but not too badly; ran off to the back of the lines  The previous Squad Leader had also been injured and ran off POW (00:09:53) Groggel had a decision between fighting until they were blown out; or to surrender and save his men’s lives The Squad Leader called out to the Germans; it was dark at this time The German in charge came up to them and pointed to a dead man on the ground, saying it was his best friend  Groggel thought that the Germans would take them back and shoot them  Taken to a bunker, instead Groggel’s men were all searched The German in charge acted cocky, like the portrayals of German Officers in the media They eventually took Groggel away from his men (he doesn’t know what happened to them) (00:11:15) Held with some other officers and outfits that were taken Wound up being taken to register as a POW �Went through Poland and five different War Camps; in Poland for less than two weeks, Russians had come  Had to quarantine because some men had Scarlet Fever Marched with the refugees, 350 miles in 45 days up to the Baltic Sea  Went to Hannover, Germany In Hannover, was with prisoners from other countries Hannover, March 27: heard battle outside, thought they would be liberated (00:12:22)  General Patton had sent a company of Tanks and Armored Infantry 60 miles behind the lines; the General had a cousin, Lieutenant Colonel Waters, who was in the camp Wound up going to Nuremberg, Germany; there for three days in the prisoner camp; American troops were coming, were marched to Münchberg, Germany (near Munich) (00:13:00) Liberated from Münchberg on April 29, 1945 Had been captured at the Pillbox on December 9, 1944 Came back home, given a leave-of-absence; went to Florida to get reassigned Wound up at Camp Robinson, Little Rock, Arkansas; discharged from there Marching Poland (00:14:28) The trek across Poland, when he was captured, was very grueling  Little food, marching with the Polish, who were very kind people  Sometimes ran across a Red Cross Parcel  Used cigarettes to trade  One night, stood in the rain for 14 hours for a cup of soup and a loaf of bread split between six people Heard about another prisoner (a few years before present day) that had gotten sick during the march 225 miles in; was captured by the Russians (00:15:52) 1500 prisoners in Poland to 500 prisoners in Hannover; many had gotten sick, or captured �The conditions in Bavaria were a little better because the weather was warmer (00:16:35) Was reunited with one of his buddies he enlisted with, a Tail-gunner in a B-24 just before they were liberated Recognized Val (his good friend) on a motor bike, but finally met him when he was in the latrine a few days later Went back overseas together During the march, had to worry about frost (00:18:00)  Every night, the Germans would try to house the prisoners in a barn  When they would leave to continue the march, would send dogs into the barn to see if anyone was hiding in it; they also would shoot the barn with machine guns  Some would try to escape, but it was futile unless they knew how to speak German When he was captured, along with four other officers, they boarded all prisoners on a 3rd Class train on Christmas Eve (00:19:10)  Had three guards on them; youngest was 57 years old and the oldest was 61 years old  When approaching Koblenz, Germany an air raid was alarmed and everyone was taken off the train to the shelter  One of the guards forgot their rifle, so Groggel handed it to him; figured they would need it  Went on to Lindberg, Germany to get registered (as a POW) During the war, food was scarce, so as they took the train from Poland, Groggel could see carcasses of horses along the tracks cut away (00:20:20)  Would be fed horse meat, some men even ate it raw  Had grass soups  Had to get through it, some men couldn’t handle it �German Pillbox Story, revisited (00:21:18) The base floor had a lot of bunks and food stored The second floor had the sliding doors for protection When they had to get out, they burned the maps and information; then waited till dusk so it would protect them from enemy fire They were going to escape, but they had already begun firing at the doors; so they were captured April 29, 1945, General Patton came through Münchberg and liberated them; they were overjoyed (00:23:15)  One man wrote it as, “If you wanted to see grown men cry…” after their liberation Military Life and Training (00:24:05) Had a lot of new responsibilities; early morning calls, evening: taps; training systems Basic Training for Anti-aircraft had to train with rifles and weapons; Infantry: learned to counter blows against an opponent with the butt of a rifle, very rough Part of the training for Infantry, Infiltration Course: crawled across the ground on your stomach to avoid machine gunfire, conditions would change often Bivouac days, 25-mile march back to camp after two weeks of training on the field, a little tough Didn’t write much after going overseas; when captured, was given the opportunity to write a card home (00:26:03)  Newspaper back home (in Kalamazoo), would list MIA’s, so Groggel wanted to tell them what had happened to him; he arrived home before the card ever did Groggel had an older brother in the Marines who was over in the Pacific, there for about three years (00:26:55)  Groggel wanted to be in the Marines but couldn’t due to his Colorblindness  Out of the three guys he had signed up with for the Marines, only one got in, John Rapids Describes his specialization in Anti-aircraft (00:28:00)  Divisions and Units were always sent together overseas �Home (00:28:47) Wasn’t hard to readjust to civilian life; went back and finished college  The hardest thing was going back in to Chemistry  Went into Business, Mathematics and Accounting mainly; got a Bachelor’s Degree in Science Kept in contact with one of his buddies (Val) after the War, knew of others who had served A man in Lansing who had been in his Battalion and Regiment saw Groggel’s write-up in a Bimonthly Division Paper contacted him (00:30:03)  Invited Groggel to go to France to review the territories after meeting with him a couple times  The French were celebrating the Veterans and what they had done for them; paid for their travel, one day  Heard about this in a newspaper (Chicago Tribune)  Spoke with another Veteran who went through the March from Poland, as well France, revisited (00:33:50) Wasn’t in the ETO for very long  Went across the English Channel and landed in Omaha (after the Invasion)  Very choppy waters, storms  The conditions for battle were very foggy in France  Trenches were filled with water; Army Paper: change your socks everyday  There was a German tower beyond the hill Groggel’s men were behind, but couldn’t see anything  Germans would fire mortar and artillery, shrapnel  When “Screaming Mimi’s” were heard, had to take cover in the trenches  Always heard the V-1 and V-2 Bombs; couldn’t see them because of the fog  Had to keep silent to see where they would explode �o At the beginning of the War, the Germans did not have many of these Bombs, it could have made a difference in the War’s turnout Felt overjoyed when coming back home, didn’t really think of how the War affected him (00:37:15) Glad that he didn’t go into the Marines or his other choice of service (gliders?) because he may have never come back home Did not have any serious individual meeting with the Germans; had their zone to protect; very short period of time Very thankful for being able to come back home Lessons (00:38:55) Learned to listen, be on time; think as a whole, not about oneself As an officer, had to be a strong leader When at the Pillbox, sent out some scouts Found out that Groggel’s Division (90th Division) was at the Battle of the Bulge, December 16 Had another older brother in the Navy and a younger brother who was a Paratrooper The fights now are different; in WWII, you knew who your enemy was, now there is a lot more subterfuge For those who aren’t sure what they want to do, joining the Army is a good way to learn discipline Feels very proud to have served his country � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Groggel, Richard (Interview outline and video), 2009 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Groggel, Richard Description An account of the resource Richard Groggel served during World War II in Germany and France as a Replacement Officer for the 90th Division in 1944. Shortly after arriving, he and his severely shorthanded platoon were captured by a German outfit when defending from a pillbox. Groggel was then registered as a POW on December 9, 1944 and was sent to a camp in Poland. A few weeks later, as the Russians approached, the prisoners marched across Poland to Germany, under grueling conditions, and then had to march south from Hannover to Munich as other Allied forces approached. His liberation by General Patton's forces came on April 29, 1945 in Münchberg, Germany. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Krieger, Ben (Interviewer) Schram, Donald (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Michigan--History, Military Veterans Video recordings United States. Army World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2009-10-11 Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroggelR0327V Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/fcd0922656f106afdc66d0914418f588.m4v aba0d7576fb1ff80665b7532e4808f7c https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/0ee48380d63d2838083aa211c3cf95f4.pdf c467a0afec819cc016b783d1836112d5 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veterans' History Project Richard Groggel World War II 59 minutes 35 seconds (00:00:33) Early Life -Born on July 22, 1924 in Kalamazoo, Michigan -Born in a house in Kalamazoo -Father worked as a grinder on a machine in the parchment department of a paper factory -Mother was into playing local sports -She was on a women's basketball team and a bowling league -He had four siblings -One older sister and three brothers -Mother's name was Esther -Father's name was Kurt -Sister's name was Dorothy -He and his brothers all served in the military -All of them survived the war -Went to Lincoln Junior High School -Went to Kalamazoo Central High School -Graduated in January 1942 (00:04:03) Getting Drafted -Tried to get into the Marines, but couldn't because his brother was already in the Marines -Got drafted into the Army in March 1943 -Sent to Camp Grant, Illinois for processing and induction (00:04:17) Overview of Service-Pre-Deployment -Sent to Camp Hulen, Texas for anti-aircraft training -Had to learn how to spot planes and differentiate between friendly and hostile planes -Went to Fort Davis, North Carolina for officer training -Graduated as a second lieutenant -Took ninety days -Officers produced from the program were nicknamed "ninety day wonders" -Helped train troops in California -Tried to get into the Airborne, but never got in -Got deployed before he could join the paratroopers (00:05:09) Deployment to the European Theatre Pt. 1 -Sent to Fort Meade, Maryland and boarded a ship -Sailed across the Atlantic Ocean -Had to zig-zag to avoid U-Boats -Landed at Liverpool, England (00:05:30) Training �-Had one semester at Western Michigan University prior to attempting to enlist in the Marines -Not his choice to go into the anti-aircraft, assigned to him by the Army -Had basic training at Camp Hulen, Texas -Difficult -Did a lot of marching -Had to do a five mile march -If you didn't complete it you didn't get a weekend pass -Had German prisoners of war working at Camp Hulen -They worked in the fields around camp -He had no contact with them -Received anti-aircraft training after his basic training -Had to learn all of the planes being used by both sides -Allies gained air superiority, so he was reassigned to the infantry -Sent to Fort Benning, Georgia for infantry training -Eight weeks of training -Days during training were eight hours long and started around 6 AM -Spent most of his time in the various bases he trained at -Went to Fort Davis, North Carolina for officer training -Second lieutenant -In charge of forty eight men -Never had a full strength platoon though (00:11:02) Deployment to the European Theatre Pt. 2 -Went to Liverpool, England -Crossed the English Channel and landed at Normandy, France -Landed there about six months after D-Day in fall 1944 (00:11:45) Fighting in France Pt. 1 -Moved into France and took up positions on the Moselle River in France -He was assigned to lead 2nd platoon -Ten men pulled from 1st platoon -Ten men pulled from 3rd platoon -At a disadvantage because he didn't have a full platoon -The 2nd platoon had a high turnover rate -Unit had lost a lot of men fighting at Metz -Moved across France toward Germany -Lost two men in the process -One man was wounded and had to be evacuated -Initially stayed in slit trenches on the frontlines -Small trenches you could stand or squat in -His feet were frozen after standing in a trench full of water -His platoon helped him get back to the rear -Pulled back for R&R -As soon as they got to the rear they were sent back to the frontline -Had nerve damage from his frozen feet (00:15:19) Deployment to the European Theatre Pt. 3 -Sailed to England on the SS Mariposa �-Soldiers played cards to pass the time -Crossing the Atlantic wasn't too bad -Crossing the English Channel was more difficult -Seas were rough -Had to go from one ship to another ship -One soldier fell between the ships, but was pulled out unharmed (00:17:16) Fighting in France Pt. 2 -Remembers hearing German buzz bombs shortly after arriving in France -Remembers the German 88mm artillery guns -Had to dive for cover as soon as you heard the incoming shell -Very little defense against the 88mm -When they returned to the frontline his platoon was assigned to a pillbox -Had bunks, food, ammunition and grenades in the basement -Had a soldier with a Browning Automatic Rifle guarding the rear door -Remembers when the Germans were only thirty five yards away -Platoon sergeant got wounded while at the pillbox -Germans probed their lines at night -They were cut off from their larger unit -German artillery knocked out their field telephone lines (00:23:15) Getting Captured -Decided to leave the pillbox to rejoin their unit -Got pinned down by nearby German soldiers -Some of the men suggested surrender -Decided it would be best to surrender rather than fight to the death -They surrendered on the far-western German frontier -They were told to come out of the pillbox with their hands up -Leader of the German troops said they had wounded his best friend -Richard thought they were all going to be executed on the spot -Taken back to a German bunker -Questioned by the Germans -He talked with the German officers and found them to be arrogant -One German soldier took his watch (00:26:20) Prisoner of War Pt. 1 -He was placed with other captured American officers -Guarded by two middle-aged German soldiers -Put on a 40 & 8 boxcar and taken to Koblenz, Germany -Arrived there around Christmas Eve 1944 -Remembers the Germans singing carols -There was an air raid when they got to Koblenz -Germans asked if they were from the Army Air Force -The prisoners told them that they were infantry -Had they been airmen the Germans probably would have shot them -Went across German to be registered as a prisoner of war -Given a POW dog tag -Taken by train to Oflag 64 in Szubin, Poland �-There were twenty four men in the boxcar -Stood, sat, and slept in eight hour shifts -Eight men stood, eight men sat, and eight men slept -Not fed -Passed through Berlin on the way to Poland -Arrived at Oflag 64 -Given some oatmeal -Quarantined for two weeks due to some of the prisoners being sick -Soviets were advancing so the prisoners at Oflag 64 were removed on January 21, 1945 -Moved to a Polish refugee camp -It was awful -Had part of a Red Cross parcel -Traded cigarettes for extra food -Poles were friendly -Slept in barns as they were marched across Poland -Some men tried to hide in haystacks -SS troops were called in to flush out the prisoners -First they used dogs, then moved on to shooting into the hay -One of the guards had lived in the U.S. and spoke English -He said he'd stay with the prisoners if they encountered the Soviets -He'd rather be captured with American prisoners than with other German soldiers -Marched 350 miles in forty five days -Walked all of that in the cold Given meager rations -Bad coffee and very little food -Once you got used to the coffee it was good -Arrived at Oflag XIII-B at Hammelburg, Germany on March 10, 1945 (00:35:50) Task Force Baum & the Hammelburg Raid -In late March 1945 a contingent of American infantry and tanks came to Oflag XIII-B -Force led by Captain Abraham Baum -Special mission to rescue General Patton's son-in-law John K. Waters -Unfortunately the mission was a failure (00:36:45) Prisoner of War Pt. 2 -Taken by train to a prisoner of war camp near Nuremberg -Witnessed a massive bombing raid on the city -The city was levelled after the raid -After Hammelburg they were taken to Stalag VII-A in Moosburg north of Munich -Germans told them if they stole anything they would be shot -Managed to sneak a chicken and cook it on a small fire -When he was at Nuremberg he ran into an old friend from Kalamazoo -Moved around to keep from being liberated by the Soviets -In one prisoner of war camp the mattresses were full of ticks (00:42:04) Liberation -Liberated by General Patton and the 14th Armored Division on April 29, 1945 -A lot of the prisoners cried tears of joy upon being liberated -Taken by C-47 to Camp Lucky Strike in France �-Examined by doctors and fed (00:43:13) Coming Home Pt. 1 -Taken by ship to England to collect war-brides before going back to the United States -Family didn't know he was a prisoner of war -Only knew that he was missing in action (00:45:30) Living Conditions as a Prisoner of War -Didn't get much food as a prisoner of war -Germans didn't have much food for themselves -Never saw organized beatings or torture at the hands of the Germans -Only saw abuse once when a German soldier hit an American prisoner -Had blankets -Men died from malnutrition -Allowed to play cards in the prisoner of war camps -Remembers watching some of the prisoners play bridge (00:48:06) Coming Home Pt. 2, End of the War, & End of Service -Took quite a while to get back to full health -Felt better after being fed at Camp Lucky Strike -Sailed from England to New York City -Given a sixty day leave after he got back to the U.S. -Visited his family -They were surprised to see him -He called his parents when he got back in the U.S. -Went down to Miami, Florida for part of his leave -In Miami on VJ Day (August 15, 1945) -Remembers everyone in the streets celebrating -It was overwhelming that the war was over -Stayed in his hotel room and thanked God that the war was over -Shortly after the war ended he was discharged in August 1945 -Had been in since March 1943 -Discharged with the rank of first lieutenant (00:54:18) Life after the War -Used the GI Bill at Western Michigan University -Initially planned on studying electrical engineering -Changed it to math and accounting -Worked as an accountant for a company that did electroplating -Worked closely with major car companies in Detroit -Had no lasting psychological or physical trauma from the war -Recovered from malnutrition after a few months -Met his wife at WMU -She was studying teacher -Married sixty six years -Had two sons and two daughters -Sue, Richard Jr., David, and Beth �� Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27_GroggelR1877V Title A name given to the resource Groggel, Richard W (Interview outline and video), 2015 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2015-08-28 Description An account of the resource Richard Groggel was born on July 22, 1924 in Kalamazoo, Michigan. In March 1943 he was drafted into the Army. He received basic training and anti-aircraft training at Camp Hulen, Texas before being reassigned to the infantry. He received infantry training at Fort Benning, Georgia before receiving officer training at Fort Davis, North Carolina. He was commissioned as a second lieutenant and trained soldiers in California before being assigned to an infantry unit. They deployed out of Fort Meade, Maryland in fall 1944 bound for the European Theatre. They moved from England to France and took up positions on the German frontier. During the Battle of the Bulge in December 1944 Richard and his platoon were captured by Germans. He was moved to prisoner of war camps across Germany and Poland, he marched 350 miles across Poland and witnessed the failed Task Force Baum raid on Hammelburg prisoner of war camp. He was liberated from Stalag VII-A on April 29, 1945, and after recovery at Camp Lucky Strike, France he returned to the United States. He was discharged in August 1945 shortly after Japan's surrender. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Groggel, Richard W. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Moore, Deb (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Veterans Video recordings World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American United States. Army Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Moving Image Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project collection, (RHC-27)</a> Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/vocab/InC/1.0/">In Copyright</a> Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University Libraries. Allendale, Michigan Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource video/x-m4v application/pdf https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/0dc3ab78f0a490627daf812449686d69.jpg 1ad920cc2923f441c4109105c1f1d716 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Robert H. Merrill photographs Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1909/1950 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-222 Description An account of the resource Photographs, negatives, and lantern slides digitized from the papers of engineer and archaeologist Robert H. Merrill. A Grand Rapids native, Merrill held an accomplished career as a civil engineer. He founded the company Spooner & Merrill, which held offices in Grand Rapids and Chicago. From 1919-1921, Merrill lived in China, working as Assistant Principal Engineer on a reconstruction of the Grand Canal - the oldest and longest canal system in the world. Merrill became fascinated by archaeology, and among other projects, he traveled to the Uxmal Pyramids in Yucatan, Mexico, with a research expedition from Tulane University. Merrill's photo collection includes images of his travels and projects, friends and family. Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context Merrill_EastmanAlbum_1_1909_068 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1909-07-16 Title A name given to the resource Groins at Macatawa Description An account of the resource Black and white photograph of homes and groin structures along the shoreline in Macatawa, Michigan. Subject The topic of the resource Macatawa, Lake (Mich.) Groins (Shore protection) Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Language A language of the resource eng Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/2b574a3aa333207dca67482b8b3cabaf.m4v 9d7c3192ee1c292aacd70530e1e77c53 https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/4ab8b7d56d970454d4158de085e229e8.pdf b737c7055729bdf528453f9f5a53ba77 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veterans' History Project Glenn Gronevelt Vietnam War 1 hour 27 minutes 57 seconds (00:00:42) Early Life -Born in Grand Haven, Michigan in 1947 -Father worked in construction with his brother -Glenn started working with his father in construction when he was 12 years old -Grew up in Grand Haven -Graduated from high school in 1965 -Went to junior college -Graduated with an associate degree in drafting in 1968 -Started dating his future wife and they were planning on getting married (00:01:58) Enlisting in the Navy -He believed he would eventually get drafted -Wife had a nursing degree -Recruiters approached him and his girlfriend about enlisting in the military -With a construction background he was told he could join the Navy with rank and rating -He would be an E-7 (chief petty officer; similar to an Army sergeant first class) -Navy said they would take him as an E-5 (petty officer, second class; similar to sergeant) -He would have the ranking of carpenter in a construction battalion (CB or “Seabee”) -Went to Detroit for a physical three times -Enlisted in the Navy in January or February 1969 -Nearly got drafted before getting approved for the Navy -One day after his third physical and getting approved for the Navy he received his draft notice -Men tried to get out of military service -Failing the colorblindness test -Some men drank a lot of coffee so they had high blood pressure during the physical -Physical examiners made them sit until their blood pressure normalized (00:06:05) Awareness of the Vietnam War -Listened to the ABC radio broadcaster Paul Harvey at noon -He was a conservative radio broadcaster that talked about the Vietnam War -Saw news reports about Vietnam on the evening news -Viewed the Vietnam War with a sense of fatalism -Knew he would probably have to go to war and accepted that fact -Neutral about the politics and morality of the war -Paul Harvey started off as a supporter of the war, then as it dragged on he became negative (00:07:38) Navy Introductory Course -Sent to the Naval Construction Battalion Center in Gulfport, Mississippi -Five week introductory course in the Navy -Learned about the history of the Seabees, about rank in the Navy, and about ratings in the Navy -Taught to think of yourself as part of a unit -Not as extreme as in the Marines -Treated with a little more respect because you had work experience -Still knew what your place was in the unit -Went through a screening process to see if what your rank and rating ought to be �-He was dropped to E-4 (petty officer third class) and changed to being a steel worker -Coerced to stay in the Navy with a lower rank -You could leave the Navy, and as soon as you left you would get drafted -Expected to be disciplined, to maintain a clean uniform and bed, and to have proper hygiene -If you made a mistake you were punished -Trained with a mix of men -They all went to different battalions -Only one man he trained with went with him to Vietnam (00:13:24) Enlistment Schedule Pt. 1 -Tour in Vietnam would be 12 months -A Seabee enlistment was for 30 months -Normal enlistment was for 24 months -Needed to serve three months in the United States -Serve nine months in Vietnam -Serve six months in the United States -Serve another nine months in Vietnam (00:15:22) Combat Training -Received 18 days of leave after the training in Gulfport -Got married during the leave -Sent to Naval Construction Battalion Center Port Hueneme, California for combat training -Learned how to storm machine gun nests -Lasted four weeks (00:16:10) Deployment to Vietnam -Sent north to Tacoma, Washington -Boarded a plane to fly to Vietnam the next day -Stopped in Guam then flew on to Vietnam -Flew on a chartered TWA airliner (00:16:59) Arrival in Vietnam -Arrived in Vietnam on June 1, 1969 -Arrived on a weekend, so the battalion wasn't working -Got off the plane in Cam Ranh Bay -It was very hot and he could smell the jungle -Will never forget a smell like that -Processed at the airport -At 10 PM he got on a truck and drove to the far end of the peninsula where his battalion was stationed -Saw flares going off -Passed an ammunition dump -Didn't know that the further down the peninsula you went the safer you were -Assigned to a bunk at the Seabee base -On Monday morning he was directed to battalion headquarters for more processing -He was basically on his own for two days -Found the mess hall on his own -Went to a beautiful nearby beach (00:20:21) Seabee Base at Cam Ranh Bay -The barracks were pretty good at the Seabee base -Had huge fans circulating air -Had an air conditioned recreation room in the barracks -Two stories -Bathrooms were in a separate building next to the barracks �-Had hot and cold running water and flushing toilets -Able to build what they wanted because they were a construction battalion -Army had the worst living conditions on Cam Ranh Bay -Air Force had the best living conditions on Cam Ranh Bay -Sidewalks, flower boxes, and other hallmarks of a “normal” American community -Had bunkers built between the barracks -The further up the peninsula you went the more bunkers you saw -Buildings further up the peninsula had 55 gallon drums filled with sand around the base of buildings (00:22:55) Enemy Contact -Viet Cong militants harassed Cam Ranh Bay -Usually attacked at 4:30 or 5 AM -Sporadically fired mortars or rockets at the base in the hopes of hitting something -Saw more attacks at the naval air base than at the Seabee base -Took random sniper fire at the Seabee base -Viet Cong sneaked onto the ridge around the base and took shots at the Seabee base -Caught a few Viet Cong trying to sneak in by way of the sea -They were caught and detained (00:25:30) Construction Duty in Cam Ranh Bay -Processed on Monday after he arrived in Vietnam -Had his picture taken and it was sent home to show his family he was in Vietnam -Assigned to a company -Spent the next six months working in Cam Ranh Bay -Assigned to Construction Battalion Maintenance Unit (CBMU) 302 -302 handled the southern half of Vietnam (I Corps and II Corps) -Duty was to maintain various naval facilities -Worked at the naval air facility quite a bit -Did dock maintenance for Patrol Boat, River (PBRs) and Patrol Craft Fast (“Swift boats”) -Worked with teams of three to ten men -Went out for projects that lasted a few days to a few weeks -Build mud boxes for the masons to make their bricks -Did a lot of welding repair -Installed new exhaust fans in the kitchen -Went in at 7 or 8 PM to start working -Cooks were grateful so they let the Seabees have free access to the cooler -They had one of the Seabees working the griddle and cooking them food while they worked -That project took about one week (00:29:30) Daily Routine -Got up in the morning and reported for roll call with his company -Went about doing maintenance work -Work day ended at about 5 PM -Went to get dinner then had the rest of the night to yourself -Go to the movie theater -Go to the Enlisted Men Club -Pass the time with other forms of recreation -Sometimes had to do drills at night -Go to the bunkers or go to a fighting position (00:30:55) Shore Patrol Duty -Seabees had to do Shore Patrol duty -He did Shore Patrol duty a few times �-As a Shore Patrolman he carried a pistol, a badge, and a nightstick -Patrolled the beach, the Enlisted Men Club, and the movie theater -Keeping things in order and dealing with troublemakers -At the Enlisted Men Club he was stationed outside of the women's dressing room -Keeping out men trying to get into the room -Never ran into any problems as a Shore Patrolmen -Men respected the Shore Patrolmen because they had total backing from command -Primarily policed sailors, but also soldiers and airmen (00:33:20) Vietnamese Civilians Pt. 1 -Had a lot of Vietnamese civilians working at Cam Ranh Bay -They were bused onto the base in the morning -Had an older Vietnamese man working in the metal shop with them -Learning how to do metalwork -Remembers he was a very nice man -A lot of civilians did cleaning and other manual labor -At night they were searched for stolen goods then bused back off the base -Didn't detect any Viet Cong sympathizers -Heard a story about a Vietnamese barber that worked on an American base -One night the base was attacked and the next day the soldiers found the barber's body -He had been a Viet Cong militant -Didn't really know for sure who was, and who wasn't, part of the Viet Cong (00:35:55) Downtime in Cam Ranh Bay -Didn't get off of Cam Ranh Bay for the first five or six months in Vietnam -Went up the peninsula to the larger post exchanges (PX: military general store) -Could buy cameras, fans, refrigerators, etc. -Able to move around the peninsula with a lot of freedom (00:36:45) Construction Duty in Cat Lo -Assigned to a small construction detachment in the fishing village of Cat Lo -Mission was to use pontoons to create barges that could move supplies up and down the Saigon River -Took a few weeks -Stationed at a small Army base near Cat Lo -Had a tank farm, 155mm howitzers, a chain-link fence around the base, and bunkers -Remembers lying in bed and hearing explosions -He jumped out of his bunk into his boots and threw on his flak jacket -Ran into a nearby bunker, but no one joined him -Howitzers were doing a fire mission, so the explosions were outgoing fire not incoming (00:39:51) Construction Duty in New Port -Returned to Cam Ranh Bay from Cat Lo then got sent to a construction detachment in New Port -New Port was a supply area in Saigon on the Saigon River -Held supplies until they got distributed throughout the country -The Seabees built an extension to increase the supply area of the warehouse -Spent four or five weeks there (00:41:05) Vietnamization -Returned to Cam Ranh Bay to build a two-building schoolhouse for South Vietnamese sailors -Beginning of the Vietnamization processing -Turning the war over to the South Vietnamese and pulling U.S. troops out of Vietnam -Seabee battalions stayed behind -Mission changed from maintenance to building villages -Idea was to build villages for the South Vietnamese soldiers' families �-If the soldiers had their families nearby they wouldn't desert -Gave the Vietnamese buildings with rooms and indoor plumbing -Designed a building that would serve as a concrete block factory for building projects -First concrete block factory built in Vietnam -Chief of Naval Operations came to Vietnam to visit the factory -Helped his lieutenant commander's career -Built a second concrete block factory between Saigon and Long Binh (00:46:25) Pay Problem with the Navy -The Navy offered him a reward program where he would get a $300 bonus -Bonus got reduced to only $25 -Refused to accept that -Wrote his congressman for support -Battalion commander refused to budge on the deal -He wound up accepting the $25 bonus -Only got $20 because there was a $5 tax (00:48:40) Saigon -Able to travel throughout Saigon -Saw the Saigon Zoo, the Presidential Palace, pagodas, and embassies -Visited restaurants and tried local food -Went to the markets in Saigon -You could buy anything in Saigon (drugs, sex, produce, meats) -A lot less restricted in Saigon -Basically given free reign in Saigon -There were huge P.X.s in Saigon -A lot of black market activity in Saigon -You could buy a carton of cigarettes for $1.50 -You could then trade that carton on the black market for 10x its worth -Same with a box of Tide laundry detergent -Could get free alcohol for a month by working with bartenders to get them supplies -Didn't carry weapons in Saigon -Curfew was set at 10 PM -Military Police were pretty strict at enforcing that curfew -Some men rented apartments in Saigon so they could live with their Vietnamese girlfriends -Only had to show up for roll call in the morning (00:53:44) Enlistment Schedule Pt. 2 -In Vietnam for 13 months -Normal tour was 12 months -Had gotten shipped out a month early -Possible to have gotten stationed somewhere for 12 months and a second tour in Vietnam -If you volunteered to stay in Vietnam for an extra month you wouldn't have to do a second tour (00:55:35) R&R -Got at least one guaranteed R&R -In February 1970 he took his R&R in Hawaii -Five days -Government paid for his plane ticket and his wife's ticket (00:56:35) Loss of a Friend -Wife met a couple in Hawaii whose son was a Marine in Vietnam -Husband was a friend with his father, so Glenn grew up with the Marine son -Son was killed in action �-Family initially wanted him to escort their son's body home -Decided against it because they didn't want to associate Glenn with that (00:57:32) Opinion of the Vietnam War -Brother-in-law had served in Vietnam before Glenn -He believed the Vietnamese were second class humans -After his tour in Vietnam Glenn could at least understand where he was coming from -He was neutral going over to Vietnam -After his tour he saw it as a civil war between the Vietnamese, not an international conflict -America had no business being there -Believes American politicians killed 58,000 American servicemen and countless civilians -Disappointed in America's leadership -Domino Theory was never going to happen and the leaders should have admitted that (01:00:32) Invasion of Cambodia -He was in Saigon during the invasion of Cambodia in spring of 1970 -Saw President Nixon tell the American people that the United States had not invaded Cambodia -He saw huge convoys headed toward Cambodia -Wondered how much the government lied to the American people about Vietnam -How gullible were the American people? -He became cynical over the government control of the press -Knew that stories and facts weren't being given to the American people -Meant that the people weren't able to make an informed decision about the war -Believes the deception went back to the Eisenhower Administration in the 1950s -How many North Vietnamese, Viet Cong, and civilians were actually killed? -No way of ever really knowing how many people died in the war (01:04:28) Drug Use & Racial Tension -Drug use was always there in Vietnam -Smelled burning weed in the guard bunkers -Civilians brought drugs onto bases -Could buy any drug you wanted -Remembers an old man that always offered opium to him -Did not see any drug problems in his unit -Alcohol abuse was more of a problem than illegal drugs -Enlisted Men Club served alcohol to everyone -Saw racial tensions on the periphery -Had black men in his battalion -Always saw cooperation between the races when they worked -Did not see any black officers -Black sailors and soldiers were used for common labor -There was some self-imposed segregation among the men -In Saigon there was a neighborhood where black soldiers rented apartments -White servicemen were not welcome -Remembers black soldiers being frustrated with fighting a “white man's war” -Visited Long Binh Jail -Predominantly black prisoners (01:10:36) Vietnamese Civilians Pt. 2 -Left Vietnam with a positive view of the Vietnamese people -Wanted to help modernize the Vietnamese and give them better living conditions -Wondered if the United States set their progress back because of the war -Befriended a Vietnamese maid �-Exchanged language dictionaries -Got to know a Vietnamese girl that worked at a cafeteria in New Port in Saigon -Learned about the cultural and familial expectations of young women in Vietnam -Wanted to learn more about the Vietnamese culture -They were innovative and intelligent people -Especially when it came to mechanical things (01:14:12) Coming Home & End of Service -Left Vietnam on July 1, 1970 -Flew back to the United States via Okinawa -Flew back into Tacom, Washington -Told they would initially be processed quickly so they could get home for the 4th of July -He then reported to Great Lakes Naval Station, Illinois for final discharge -Advised to fly home in civilian clothing to avoid harassment -Civilians should have been angry with the politicians, not the servicemen -Given three options: -Reassignment to another construction battalion -Join a Navy Reserve unit closer to home -Full discharge -Picked full discharge -Did 16 months of active duty (01:17:34) Life after the War -Took a little time off to be with his family -Had a job waiting for him with his old company when he got home -Started building his own house -Daughter was born shortly after he got home -Rejoined civilian society with no problems -Stayed with the company for a year then explored other options in the maintenance industry (01:19:09) Reflections on Service -Proud of his time he spent in the Navy -Still greatly admires the Navy -Not proud of the Vietnam War -Every Memorial Day he still visits the grave of the Marine he knew killed in Vietnam -Glad he served his country despite the conflict (01:20:30) Contact with South Korean Soldiers -There were South Korean (Republic of Korea; ROK) soldiers stationed at Cam Ranh Bay -Didn't have a lot of contact with them -They were extremely serious about fighting communism because of the Korean War -They saw things in black and white with little to no gray area -They believed the South Vietnamese should stand up and fight for their country -Shot South Vietnamese soldiers if they tried to retreat -Very tough men -Encountered some South Korean troops in Saigon -Vietnamese didn't like the South Koreans -ROK soldiers and Navy SEALs worked together to train South Vietnamese special forces (01:23:55) Interrogation of Viet Cong -Heard that the interrogation process was brutal at times -Viet Cong prisoners would be taken up into a helicopter for questioning -If they refused to cooperate they were thrown out of the helicopter -Remembers seeing a helicopter hovering in the air �-Friend started taking pictures with his camera -When the pictures developed they saw a body falling from the helicopter -Interrogation was done by the United States, South Koreans, and the South Vietnamese -Understood that war is a lot of ugliness, unfortunately (01:26:35) Reflections on Service Pt. 2 -Would like to see more stories about the support personnel of the Vietnam War -Understands the combat personnel had it bad though -There was no rear in Vietnam unlike in World War II -Meant that even being in the rear meant getting shot at and shelled -A lot of support personnel made the combat possible � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroneveltG1862V Title A name given to the resource Gronevelt, Glenn (Interview outline and video), 2015 Description An account of the resource Glenn Gronevelt was born in Grand Haven, Michigan in 1947. In early 1969 he enlisted in the Navy to be serve with the “Seabees” (Construction Battalions). He received introductory training at Naval Construction Battalion Center in Gulfport, Mississippi then went to Naval Construction Battalion Center Port Hueneme, California for combat training. He was deployed to Vietnam in late May 1969 and arrived on June 1, 1969. He was assigned to Construction Battalion Maintenance Unit 302 and did construction work in Cam Ranh Bay, at New Port warehouse in Saigon, in Cat Lo, and he helped with building projects part of the “Vietnamization” process. During his time in Vietnam he also remembers witnessing first hand the movement of troops and supplies into Cambodia. He left Vietnam on July 1, 1970 and after visiting his family for the 4th of July he reported to Great Lakes Naval Station, Illinois and was discharged from the Navy. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Gronevelt, Glenn Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James (Interviewer) WKTV (Wyoming, Mich.) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American United States. Navy Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="http://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2015-07-30 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/085171896ca9d6935569ebef59190a66.m4v 105e11dfcd0cb65959ed00d2ef2510c4 https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/5ada95cb70c30c43502c99c9a0a11d7a.pdf 8c88d5c3699fe32d46fae497095e7f69 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veterans' History Project Bill Groom 58 minutes 28 seconds (00:00:40) Early Life -Born on March 10, 1951, in Greenville, Michigan -Father served in World War II and fought the Japanese in the Pacific Theater -Before the war he worked as a taxi driver in Belding, Michigan -After the war he worked in factories in Belding and Ionia, Michigan -Mother worked as a waitress -Grandfather served in World War I -Didn't talk about his experiences in Europe -Had an older brother that died on May 8, 2014 -Younger brother lives in Ionia -Grew up in Fenwick, Michigan, for 10 or 11 years -Family lost the house in a fire -Moved to Carson City, Michigan, for two years -Moved to Sheridan, Michigan, for four years -Mother worked part-time for an electrician -Remembers when most of the roads were made of gravel -Spent entire days outside with his friends -Parents placed his older brother in a state home in Coldwater, Michigan -He lived there until 1972 when a foster family took him in -Bill took him out to eat, or took him to the fair at least once a month -Attended Central Montcalm High School -Graduated in 1969 (00:05:42) Vietnam War & Enlisting in the Air Force -Didn't pay too much attention to the Vietnam War and other national events -Knew that he wanted to fight and help win the war -His draft number was 400 -The higher the number, the less of a chance he would get drafted -Friend and him decided to enlist in the Air Force in their senior year of high school -Six month delayed enlistment -Meant he would start training after he graduated from high school (00:08:42) Training & First Duty Station -Sent to Lackland Air Force Base, Texas, for basic training -Lasted six weeks -Sent to Lewistown Air Force Station, Montana, as his first duty station -Assigned to a radar site and the 694th Radar Squadron -Had received maintenance training and advanced training with diesel mechanics -Learned about vehicle maintenance and operation (00�:10:26) Service during Vietnam War -In October 1972 he volunteered to go overseas to Vietnam -Spent a year overseas -Stationed at U-Tapao Royal Thai Navy Airfield, Thailand -Saw it as a new, exciting adventure -Dating his future wife at the time -Stopped in Saigon, South Vietnam, for a few days �-Originally supposed to be stationed there -Volunteered to work in the bomb dump at U-Tapao -Storage of heavy bombs as well as loading and unloading bombs from aircraft -Remembers Saigon was loud, about as big as Detroit, and dirty -Enjoyed his time in Thailand -Saw a B-52 bomber crash in front of him -Heard the men screaming as they burned alive -Tail gunner had survived by bailing out over the ocean -Six out of the seven crewmen died in the crash -Bomber had taken severe damage on a bombing run -Lost half of its engines -Pilot attempted to land, but crashed on the runway -Saw Bob Hope as part of USO performance and got to shake his hand -Tremendous morale boost for the men -Had contact with “Agent Orange” (highly toxic defoliant) -Has since suffered no ill-effects from the chemical -Didn't know he had been exposed at the time -Visited Bangkok three or four times -Went to the bars -Got there by bus -Tight security in the city -Three militants tried to throw a satchel charge into the B-52 hangar -Neutralized the intruders to send a message to any future attacks -Served in Thailand for one year and one day -Left on October 3, 1973 -In April 1975 South Vietnam fell -Involved with Operation Linebacker II in December 1972 -Sent out 100 B-52 bombers every 24 hours -Worked 12 to 14 hours a day handling bombs -Bombardment of Hanoi, North Vietnam (00:21:35) Enlisting in the Air National Guard & Overview of Service -Discharged from active duty in the Air Force in San Francisco -Came home and worked as a civilian for a year -Enlisted in the Air National Guard at Battle Creek, Michigan, in 1975 -Became a full-time technician for the Air National Guard in 1980 to March, 2008 (00:22:54) Civilian Life -Married four years before having any children -Had two sons and a daughter -Worked at Attwood in Lowell, Michigan -Worked as a material handler in the warehouse -Flexible with his Air National Guard schedule -Younger brother worked with him (00:24:24) Stationed at Battle Creek Air National Guard Base -Worked on vehicles at the base -Went to Diesel School -Learned how to work on firetrucks and refueling trucks -As a full-time guardsmen he wore his uniform every day and worked 6 a.m. to 5 p.m. -Enjoyed full-time work -Worked as a “federal technician” �(00:25:47) Children -One son enlisted in the Air Force and the other enlisted in the Air National Guard -They both accepted Bill's career and were motivated by it to enlist -Daughter accepted his career, and it didn't bother her (00:26:30) Gulf War -On-call during the Gulf War -He would be deployed if necessary -Thought he would be in the war and be gone for a while -Sons were in high school at the time, and his daughter was in elementary school -Attended a parade in Greenville for Air National Guard and the National Guard -Trained personnel how to do maintenance in a combat zone -Remove parts from aircraft to repair another aircraft faster than wait for parts -Knew there would be conflict in the future as long as Saddam Hussein lived (00:30:35) Oldest Son's Service -Oldest son enlisted in the Air National Guard after high school -Inspired by Bill's military service -Served as a crew chief on the A-10 Warthog (anti-tank aircraft) -Went to Italy together on a deployment -Most likely Aviano Air Base (00:32:12) Yugoslavian Conflicts -Deployed to Italy due to fighting in Yugoslavia, specifically Kosovo -Note: Either Operation Deliberate Force (August-September 1995) or Operation Allied Force (March-June 1998) -Kept vehicles maintained on the base and drove around the base -Italy was the best foreign country he ever served in -Great food, hospitable people, and beautiful countryside -Visited Venice -Dirty water, sprawling city, and cleaner than Thailand -Cost $50 (USD) for a gondola ride (00:35:02) Younger Son's Service -Second son enlisted in the Air Force because of his brother and Bill's service -Served as a crew chief for the F-16 Fighting Falcon (fighter jet) -Stationed at Shaw Air Force Base, South Carolina -Enjoyed hearing his sons argue about which aircraft was better (00:37:05) Nephew's Service -His nephew enlisted in the Air National Guard -Started as an engineer, but transferred to food service -Hurt his ankle after falling from a telephone pole (00:38:38) September 11th Attack -He was on base on September 11, 2001 -A worker told him that a jet struck the North Tower of the World Trade Center -Watched the second jet hit the South Tower in real time -Base placed on lock down for three days -Not allowed to leave the base for three days -Slept on a cot in his office -Sickened knowing how many people died so fast -After the jet hit the Pentagon he thought it was the beginning of a world war -Thought the attackers were either really smart or really stupid -Knew it would be a long war �(00:42:05) Deployment to Middle East -Deployed to Saudi Arabia and Kuwait in 2002 -In Saudi Arabia he worked on maintenance -In Kuwait he worked as a supervisor -Kept vehicles running and get necessary parts for vehicles (00:44:45) Iraq War -Felt the United States would be in Iraq longer than we were -Knew the war would go on until Saddam was captured or killed -Hard to send men to Iraq, especially if they were married or had children -Tried to ask for volunteers from the single men before he asked the married men -Once all the single men went he had to send the married men -Last group of men he sent over came back before he retired from the Air National Guard (00:46:36) Highest Rank -Highest rank he attained was Chief Master Sergeant (E9) -Got promoted to Chief Master Sergeant in 2003 -Served as a Chief Master Sergeant for the last five years of his career -Had no idea he would ever reach that rank -Excited and proud of his achievement -Family was proud of him -Family came to his promotion ceremony -One son and his wife each pinned a stripe on his uniform (00:48:17) Parents -Mother and father are buried at the VA cemetery in Battle Creek -Father influenced his decision to enlist in the Air Force -Gave him advice while he was in the Air Force -When Bill told him about the crash in Thailand, he told Bill to expect casualties (00:49:52) Telling His Story -Has nine grandchildren, and none of them have asked about his service yet -There are some things he'll tell them, but other things he won't tell them -Things he probably won't ever tell anyone (00:50:22) Presidents -First commander-in-chief he served under was President Nixon -Found his untrustworthy -Found President Carter to be a strange man, but supportive of the military -Thought President Reagan was the best commander-in-chief -Gave the military a lot of funding and support -President Bush (the first), was supportive and a close second to President Reagan -Had no use for President Clinton -Thought President Bush (the second) was a good leader and supportive of the military -Got out before President Obama became the president (00:53:51) Inspirations & Influences -One of the best supervisors he had was at Lewistown Air Force Station, Montana -Told Bill that Bill would make a career out of the military -Admired two colonels at Battle Creek -Both had started as enlisted men and worked their way up through the ranks -Believes he had at least one positive influence on one of his subordinates in the Air National Guard (00:55:35) Retirement -Happy to have gotten out because he got sick of the politics -Sad to leave because he left a lot of friends �-Keeps in touch with some of them, and others he has lost touch with -Reconnected with a man that served with him in Thailand (00:56:33) Awards -Has a lot of service coins and rewards from his time in the Air Force and Air National Guard -Still carries his Chief Master Sergeant coin in his pocket since he received it -Given a lever-action rifle with his name, rank, and years of service inscribed on it when he retired � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroomB1940V Title A name given to the resource Groom, Bill (Interview outline and video), 2016 Description An account of the resource Bill Groom was born on March 10, 1951, in Greenville, Michigan. In 1969 he enlisted in the Air Force and received basic training at Lackland Air Force Base, Texas. His first duty station was at Lewistown Air Force Station, Montana, with the 694th Radar Squadron where he maintained and operated vehicles. In 1972 he volunteered for overseas service, and was deployed to Thailand in October 1972. He was stationed at U-Tapao Royal Thai Navy Airfield where he helped load and unload bombs onto B-52 bombers. He stayed overseas for one year then returned home. He was discharged from active duty in San Francisco in October 1973. In 1975 he joined the Air National Guard at Battle Creek Air National Guard Base, Michigan. In 1980 he went full-time and served as a technician, working on a variety of vehicles. In the mid-1990s he deployed to Italy during the Kosovo conflict, and later in 2002 he deployed to Saudi Arabia and Kuwait to assist with maintenance and supervision of maintenance. He continued to serve in the Air National Guard until he retired in March 2008 with the rank of Chief Master Sergeant. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Groom, Bill Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Hammond, Steve (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American United States. Air Force Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="http://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2016-06-18 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/5562568785d1bad69cb7e85003ca7ccb.mp4 7c97c2c30ee910cdecd4fc597ee821af https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/6c438d16816739503fe094c3e15c2551.pdf f08cf6529aa0e105d16197a734f37428 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veteran’s History Project Vietnam War Larry Groothuis Interview Length: (01:15:07:00) Pre-enlistment / Training (00:00:10:00)  Born in Grand Rapids, Michigan in 1943 as the first of seven children (00:00:10:00)  Groothuis grew up in Grand Rapids until the 8th grade, when his parents joined the flight to the suburbs (00:00:24:00) o Groothuis’ father worked as a produce trucker delivering produce to restaurants and hospitals from Grand Rapids as far as South Haven, Michigan (00:00:45:00)  Because of Groothuis, his father did not have to serve during World War II (00:01:03:00)  During the war, Groothuis’ father drove the produce but also hauled milk and butter (00:01:06:00) th  Through the 8 grade, Groothuis attended the Southwest Christian School; after his parents moved to the suburbs, Groothuis attended Hudsonville Unity Christian, graduating in 1961 (00:01:28:00)  After graduating from high school, Groothuis wanted to get into business because accounting was something that came easily to him and he enjoyed, so he attended Davenport University in Grand Rapids for a few years (00:01:52:00) o After finishing Davenport University, Groothuis took a job working for a wholesale distributor in the northern part of Grand Rapids (00:02:03:00) o At the time, it was only a two-year program to earn a business degree from Davenport; because the war in Vietnam was siphoning off young men, when he finished the program, Groothuis had five job offers (00:02:26:00)  At that time, Groothuis had registered for the draft in Ottawa County, Michigan and had received the classification of 1-A, although the draft was not really that big of a thing at the time (00:02:58:00) o When Groothuis and his girlfriend began talking about marriage, President Kennedy passed a law forbidding the drafting of married men (00:03:09:00)  Groothuis and his girlfriend married, purchased a plot of land between Jenison and Allendale, Michigan with the intention of building a house and someday starting a family; however, the Johnson Administration eventually changed the law regarding the drafting of married men (00:03:20:00) o When the law changed, Groothuis would go to the draft board monthly in Grand Haven, Michigan to check on his status and finally, in October 1966, he walked in and a woman at the board said she thought Groothuis would go the following month (00:03:42:00)  Groothuis went home, told his wife, and a couple of weeks later, the papers finally came (00:04:07:00)  At the time, if a man was in college or was a teacher, then he had a deferment; however, that was for Michigan because Groothuis had friends in other states who did not have the same opportunities to get a deferment (00:04:30:00) �   o In November and December 1966, there was an unusually large amount of men drafted from Ottawa and Kent counties, Groothuis included (00:04:48:00) Groothuis left with a group of around fifty other men who had also received draft notices; the group filled an entire Greyhound bus and left from Grand Haven following a short ceremony, where each man received a Bible with instructions to read it every day (00:05:22:00) o The bus initially took the men to Detroit and from Detroit, the men traveled to Fort Knox, Kentucky (00:05:41:00) The group arrived at Fort Knox in the afternoon and the bus driver told them that they had about thirty seconds of laughter left (00:05:55:00) o The bus stopped at the reception center, where a man jumped aboard and told the men they had five seconds to get off the bus; Groothuis had been around the block a little in his life and he believed that the instructors were just trying to intimidate the men, especially the younger men (00:06:05:00) o The men got off the bus and their life “began anew”; they received their uniforms, shots and took a large number of tests (00:06:26:00) o When he arrived at Fort Knox, Groothuis was over twenty-three years old and after awhile, it became fairly evident that when the NCOs needed something done, they would pick the older, more mature men, such as Groothuis, as opposed to someone just out of high school (00:06:41:00) In high school, Groothuis had not been a athlete but he was still in pretty good shape; he worked on his feet all day during high school and college but once he got a job and began working behind a desk, things changed (00:07:08:00) o When he arrived at Fort Knox, Groothuis was in, at best, medium-shape but that all changed in eight weeks (00:07:29:00) o Because they arrived in November, two of the events that the men had coming up were Thanksgiving and Christmas and Groothuis’ mindset was that the instructors were not going to keep the men at the fort during those holidays, so he anticipated going home at those times (00:07:43:00)  In the meantime, the men ran around the base for their training, as well as qualifying at the rifle range; Groothuis suspects that a lot of the men training with him had been hunters because there were several good shots among the group (00:08:02:00) o By the time the eight weeks of training were complete, Groothuis was in excellent physical shape (00:08:21:00)  The day before Thanksgiving, Groothuis received word that all the men would get three weeks' leave for Christmas, so he called his wife on Thanksgiving day and let her know (00:08:30:00)  Groothuis and his wife had not seen each other since he enlisted, although she could go down to the base if Groothuis had a weekend pass, so he made sure he did everything he could to get a pass (00:08:56:00) o One time, the wife and a friend drove the four hundred miles down to see Groothuis; after Groothuis went through inspections and some other stuff, he spent the rest of the day and Sunday with his wife and her friend (00:09:09:00) �   Once he finished his basic training, Groothuis was supposed to stay at Fort Knox for another eight weeks of training (00:09:46:00) o However, Groothuis and the others did not realize the Army was going to take the top 5 percent of the class and train them to be teletype operators (00:09:53:00)  One morning, Groothuis and about ten other men went up after formation and were told that the following morning, the men were going to get up, get on a bus, and travel to Fort Gordon, Georgia (00:10:04:00) o Groothuis and the others arrived in Georgia around Easter weekend and Groothuis received permission for his wife to move down and that the couple could live offpost, away from the base (00:10:23:00) o While at Fort Gordon, Groothuis received training in the radio teletype skill and during the last two weeks, the men received training in cryptology (00:10:46:00)  At the time, use of the radio was two-fold, either with the voice talking over a microphone or by Morse code using a code key (00:11:09:00)  Groothuis learned about radio teletype at Fort Knox but at Fort Gordon, he and the others learned how to set up large systems to send messages back and forth (00:11:04:00)  At the time, there was a gray box and the men had to set different buttons to the code of the day; this was the second part of the training at Fort Gordon and Groothuis sworn an oath of secrecy about the box and received top-secret clearance (00:11:39:00) Groothuis spent another six or seven weeks at Fort Gordon before graduating and receiving orders to report to Fort Huachuca, Arizona, which was in the middle of nowhere; the Fort’s remoteness acted as a deterrent against running away, because a soldier could either only go to Mexico or be in the desert (00:12:06:00) o Groothuis’ wife followed him from Fort Gordon to Fort Huachuca, driving with a friend of hers; the couple got another house off-post and while Groothuis would go onto the base, his wife got a job working at a local bank (00:12:36:00) o Fort Huachuca was Groothuis's first permanent duty station, although a lot of the work involved guard duty and working on equipment; Groothuis did not consider the work constructive but it was meant to hone his and the other soldiers’ skills (00:13:21:00)  Most of the other soldiers lived in barracks but the married men lived in a town outside the base (00:13:40:00) One morning, the soldiers had their usually formation, although this time, the brigade, battalion, and company commanders were there and the men were told that the unit had received orders to go to Southeast-Asia (00:14:08:00) o By this time, Groothuis’ wife was pregnant, which they were both happy about, but when Groothuis received the deployment orders, he was able to get a couple of days leave before Christmas to take her home; the day after Christmas, all Groothuis’ relatives were at the airport to wish him farewell (00:14:32:00)  When Groothuis and his wife arrived in Arizona, they became acquainted with a small church there that was similar in culture to the churches in west Michigan, so when Groothuis returned to Arizona, a man and his wife from the Church was waiting to pick him up (00:15:08:00) � When the man dropped Groothuis back at the base, the man told Groothuis two things: first, he told Groothuis to write home and take a lot of pictures and second, he told Groothuis to stay strong in his faith (00:15:36:00) o Groothuis was unable to call his wife because the Army cut off all outside communication and a couple of days later, the unit left the base very early in the morning (00:15:55:00) Deployment (00:16:03:00)  From Fort Huachuca, Groothuis’ unit flew to Tucson and from Tucson, they flew to Long Beach, California (00:16:03:00) o The entire unit was deploying at the same time, which was nice because Groothuis knew all the men and their spouses knew each other (00:16:09:00) o Once in Long Beach, the unit boarded a boat named the U.S.S. Upshire, a troop transport (00:16:27:00)  Bunks aboard the ship were stacked up six high and Groothuis happened to be second from the bottom, which was nice; each man hung all his gear from his individual bunk (00:16:54:00)  It took a couple of weeks but the ship eventually arrived at the island of Okinawa, where it stopped briefly but the men were not allowed to get off (00:17:11:00)  When the ship left Okinawa, it got steadily warmer, so the men would sit on the deck of their ship in either their t-shirts or shirtless, soaking up the sun; Groothuis himself was writing home every day to occupy his time, as well as playing poker and making new friends (00:17:18:00)  Apart from Groothuis’ unit, there was also a company of Marines and a company of engineers (00:17:32:00) o One morning, the men were on the deck of the ship and they felt it turning and changing course; looking over, the men saw a destroyer escort for the ship, which indicated that they were getting closer to Vietnam (00:17:42:00)  The unit ended up debarking from the ship at a port named Qui Nhon, which was a coastal city (00:18:04:00) o From Qui Nhon, the unit convoyed with live ammunition through the mountains to the city of An Khe (00:18:10:00)  Before arriving in country, Groothuis learned that there were a lot of skirmishes as opposed to large battles along front lines (00:18:33:00) o According to Groothuis’ own recollection, the United States was in Vietnam in order to gain a military victory to oppose the domino theory, which held that if Vietnam fell, then other countries would follow and the United States would lose power in Southeast Asia (00:19:01:00)  One of Groothuis’ friends in the unit was a man from the Upper Peninsula of Michigan and during the convoy to An Khe, the man’s vehicle stopped (00:20:10:00) o The rule in a convoy was not to stop to assist any broken-down vehicles and Groothuis will never forget the look on the man’s face as he sat in his truck with mountains on either side with only one another soldier (00:20:18:00) o The convoy kept going, although a wrecker eventually came, picked the vehicle and the two soldiers up, and brought them to An Khe as well (00:20:34:00) �  When Groothuis’ unit arrived at An Khe, there was a brigade from the 82nd Airborne; the 82nd, along with the 101st Airborne, were tough and would do the lion's share [not a view shared by men in other units] of the fighting, a dynamic that changed during the Tet Offensive (00:20:48:00) o Once the soldiers arrived at An Khe, they received a meal of steak, as much as they could eat, which was a far cry from the food they had been eating on the ship, which, although nutritious, was not very good (00:21:04:00) o Groothuis’ unit arrived at An Khe in January 1968, at the very beginnings of the Tet Offensive; the soldiers' first night in An Khe, they came under an enemy rocket barrage (00:21:19:00)  During that first attack, all the men tried to get their clothes on before heading to the bunker; later, the men learned to just grab their rifles before going to the bunker (00:21:44:00) o For the first two weeks they were at An Khe, the men understood that their mission was to support the 1st Air Cavalry Division with communications between them and the 101st Airborne and the Marines (00:22:01:00)  However, after two weeks, the 1st Air Cav. and the 101st Airborne moved north and Groothuis’ unit followed behind (00:22:16:00) When the unit moved north, they did so at night and when the soldiers arrived, they took over a series of barracks, what they called “hooches”, which were nothing more than a roof with screened-in sides and plywood (00:22:32:00) o The Marines already occupying the barracks had to move into tents and there was a lot of tension and fist fights; the men in Groothuis’ unit were told to leave the Marines alone because the Marines had been through some fighting (00:22:42:00) o Shortly after Groothuis’ unit arrived, the battle around Khe Sanh began to intensify (00:22:58:00)  As the fighting increased, news came that President Johnson had ordered the soldiers to dig in and fight, which scared the men because it made them realize the severity of what they were involved in (00:23:07:00) o Once the unit arrived at Phu Bai in the north from An Khe, there was a promotion board for any soldier to go up, so Groothuis and another soldier both received promotions to be Spec-4s; originally, Groothuis’ MOS was as a radio operator but with the promotion, he became a chief radio operator (00:23:32:00)  Groothuis began operating a single radio then moved up to operating an entire radio network (00:24:18:00)  Apart from the other units, the I Corps tactical headquarters was also in Phu Bai and Groothuis lucked out because he eventually received a job at the headquarters working in an air-conditioned office (00:24:25:00)  Every so often, a general would walk into the room where Groothuis’ was working, scaring the daylights out of Groothuis (00:24:53:00) o While in Phu Bai, the soldiers ate okay, although the main menu item, which was the same thing for several weeks because the Army was unable to get supplies to the city, was mutton; to this day, Groothuis’ detests mutton (00:25:13:00)  It reached the point that Groothuis would walk into the mess, smell the mutton and decide to get a burger at the NCOs club instead (00:25:26:00) �   o All the roads in the company area were dirt and the bunkers were already built, although the soldiers had to be careful because there could be either large rats or snakes in the bunkers (00:25:45:00) o Groothuis would walk to his duty station, alternating twelve hours on and twelve hours off, seven days a week (00:26:01:00) While Groothuis would be on duty for twelve hours, every hour, he had to contact the other radios on that particular network, which were scattered throughout other bases and positions in the area (00:26:16:00) o To contact the other radios, Groothuis’ used voice mode, scrambling his voice in a box before sending the message out (00:26:27:00) o A lot of the times at night, the other radio operators would go to sleep and Groothuis would be unable to contact them, something that Groothuis would mark in a log; because he was near a general staff, Groothuis did not dare sleep when he was on duty (00:26:35:00)  Groothuis was friends with another one of the radio operators in the building and they helped keep each other awake (00:26:46:00) On the base, there were not Vietnamese soldiers but there were civilians who took over working in the kitchens (00:26:58:00) o Groothuis and the other soldiers did not have too much of a concern about the Vietnamese civilians being part of the Viet Cong; nevertheless, the soldiers were told to watch out for certain behaviors (00:27:33:00)  One time, Groothuis was sitting on top of a bunker and he saw a Vietnamese counting steps, so he immediately called his orderly room, who called the MPs, who arrested the Vietnamese; the Vietnamese was marking off the distance from the motor pool the Corps headquarters (00:27:43:00)  Groothuis and the other radio operators were kind of sitting ducks because the enemy were either going to attack the airport, which was right across the street, or the signals building, where Groothuis and the other radio operators worked (00:28:07:00)  Groothuis and the other operators experienced a large number of rocket and mortar attacks (00:28:20:00) When attacks did happen, they were often small, with the enemy “walking” the mortars in and “walking” them out; on the other hand, when the rockets came, it seemed like an earthquake (00:28:30:00) o One time, Groothuis and his friend were on duty and the friend needed to go to the bathroom, so Groothuis told him to go and he would monitor both radios; the friend was killed when a rocket attack came in and a softball-sized piece of shrapnel went through him (00:28:45:00)  After the friend had been gone a while, Groothuis asked the commanding officer, a major, what had happened and the major said that the friend had died instantly (00:29:12:00) o Overall, Groothuis believes that the enemy was just lobbing the rounds into the base; the mortars were somewhat accurate but the rockets worked with an “area of accuracy”, which meant that the rockets would land in a large area, but the enemy could not pick a specific target (00:29:48:00) �    o Next to Groothuis’ barracks was a generator trailer and one night, when a mortar attack was happening, a mortar round hit a tarp support on the trailer, causing the round to explode above the soldiers (00:30:15:00)  Groothuis, who had been lying in bed, was hit in the shoulder with shrapnel and a couple other soldiers were wounded as well (00:30:40:00)  The next day, the first sergeant told the injured men they were eligible for Purple Hearts but Groothuis did not really want to accept the medal because he had been wounded while lying in bed (00:30:56:00)  Had the mortar round actually hit the ground, the injuries amongst the soldiers would have been much higher (00:31:16:00) Because he was head of an entire radio network, Groothuis would have to occasionally go by helicopter to check and communicate with the other radio operators, who were often unreliable (00:31:35:00) o During the flights, Groothuis would fly with a general in the general’s helicopter around to the various bases in the area; the flights were during the day, which was fine with Groothuis, who did not want to fly at night (00:31:52:00) o The other radios were operated by whichever unit was stationed at the base, be it Marines, or the 101st Airborne or any other unit (00:32:34:00) During his final week in Vietnam, Groothuis went to his commanding officer (CO) to ask to visit a friend from Grand Rapids who was stationed at a nearby base (00:32:52:00) o The CO gave Groothuis the keys to his jeep, telling Groothuis to only have the jeep back by meal time, so Groothuis drove to the base where the friend was (00:33:20:00) o Groothuis found the friend, who asked how long Groothuis had been in country and when Groothuis said he was going home the following week, the friend began to cry because he had just arrived in Vietnam (00:33:31:00) When flying from base to base, the general’s helicopter would take ground fire from the enemy; however, that particular helicopter was the gunship variant of the Huey, armed with Gatling guns and rockets, so if they took fire, the crew would look for where the fire came from and attack (00:34:17:00) o Groothuis believes that the majority of the ground fire was from rifles as opposed to machine guns (00:34:43:00) o The helicopter would often get hit by the ground fire but never went down because they were never hit in a vital area (00:34:50:00) o Groothuis was more afraid of getting hit by gunfire from the open side door, so he often sat near the center of the helicopter (00:35:06:00) When Groothuis’ unit first arrived in An Khe, their CO fit in well with the company; there were a large number of Latinos in the company, either from Spanish Harlem or Dominican immigrants and the CO spoke Spanish fluently (00:35:24:00) o When the unit moved north, it was split into three parts and Groothuis’ part received a new CO, who happened to be a West Pointer (00:35:50:00)  At different times, the soldiers had to attend various classes, such as history, something they disliked doing; the classes were taught by either the NCO with the lowest seniority or the NCO with what the soldier labeled as the lowest “mentality” (00:36:08:00) �    One time, a friend of Groothuis’ raised his hand in a history class and asked if George Washington was a Democrat or Republican (00:36:36:00)  When the class ended, the West Point CO was waiting for both Groothuis and his friend and the CO warned both men to never pull a joke like that again (00:36:49:00) o Groothuis had good NCOs but because he was a little bit older and more mature than the other soldiers, the NCOs recognized that (00:37:07:00) Groothuis had a hard time obtaining any R&R but when he finally did get some, he received four days to go to Hong Kong (00:37:38:00) o Groothuis did not have a lot of money for the trip, so he wrote to his father, who sent him a hundred dollars; Groothuis also managed to get another hundred dollars in advance pay before he left (00:37:44:00) o Going to Hong Kong was nice and although Groothuis considered getting a tailored suit made because they were extremely cheap, he decided not to because he needed to send home as much money as possible to his wife and child (00:38:04:00) Groothuis also went on convoy duty, which helped him get away from the base, although everyone told him he was crazy because if the convoy was attacked, there was the possibility he could be seriously wounded (00:38:19:00) o With about two weeks to go in his tour, Groothuis was considered a “short timer” but he wanted to get out of the base, so he went up to his CO asking to go on convoy duty; the CO said Groothuis could go but he thought that Groothuis was crazy (00:38:32:00) o Convoys went daily from Phu Bai to Da Nang to pick up supplies and bring them back to Phu Bai (00:38:51:00) o The road from Phu Bai to Da Nang wound through the mountains and along the coast; at one pass in the mountains, the ground along either side kept giving way, so engineers placed a piece of metal with a metal railroad tie along the side of the road (00:38:58:00)  When the convoy went through the pass, Groothuis looked out the side of his truck and saw it was only a couple of inches away from the edge of the railroad tie, beyond which was a thousand foot drop (00:39:20:00) o The convoy eventually made it to Da Nang and began loading supplies, during which Groothuis went to the USO and got a real hamburger and French fries, which he had not have in months (00:39:35:00) o Accompanying the convoy were five-ton flatbed trucks with quad-.50 machine gun turrets mounted on them; if the crews on the guns saw so much as a puff of smoke, they would begin firing and obliterate the area (00:36:50:00) o The road was maintained by a group of engineers who slept in a culver off the side of the road guarded only by a single M-60 machine gun and a bulldozer (00:40:11:00) o Going at that single convoy was enough for Groothuis (00:40:35:00) The USO would occasionally go to Phu Bai in order to put on shows for the soldiers; it was nice to see American girls (00:40:44:00) o The soldiers also got to see the Bob Hope show once, which was nice (00:41:04:00) �     One of the biggest changes that Groothuis noticed was the attitude of incoming replacement soldiers (00:41:42:00) o Back home, Walter Cronkite and the media portrayed the war in a negative light almost every night and demonstrations at colleges and universities began to increase (00:41:50:00) o When Martin Luther King Jr. was shot, the Army played very soft music for three days because there was perceived to be a large amount of racial tension amongst the soldiers (00:42:06:00) o A couple of months later, Robert Kennedy was killed, so a large amount of the information the soldiers received about home was negative (00:42:26:00) o Groothuis believes that the United States went to Vietnam with the intention of getting a military victory but that idea changed in 1968 when Cronkite began calling for the removal of soldiers (00:43:01:00) o Groothuis and the other soldiers noticed the changes on incoming replacements, who were often insubordinate (00:43:20:00) Over the course of his tour, Groothuis’ unit accomplished their job; overall, signal soldiers were usually some of the top members of a class, so that was to be expected (00:43:47:00) When Groothuis’ unit split into three parts in An Khe, one section (Groothuis’) went north the Phu Bai, one stayed in An Khe, and one went to Chu Lai, south of Da Nang (00:44:35:00) o Initially all the soldiers were on the same schedule for going home but over time, individual soldiers would leave; replacements would come in for the departed soldiers but the replacements were often green as grass (00:45:07:00) Although Groothuis’ individual platoon, the radio platoon, was considered the “cream of the crop”, other platoons in the unit, such as the generator platoon or the motor pool, had trouble with rabble-rousers (00:45:52:00) o One time, a first sergeant who had fought in Korea pulled his pistol on an insubordinate soldier and the next day, the sergeant was gone; the older soldiers could not handle the rebelliousness of the incoming soldiers (00:46:10:00) o Instead of confronting the trouble-making soldiers, Groothuis often tried to work with them, pointing out that he did not want to be in Vietnam either (00:47:05:00)  One time, a newly-arrived soldier was pulling guard duty when Groothuis was sergeant of the guard (00:47:16:00)  Both men were on guard duty when another soldier, who was a bit of a wise-ass, began picking up rocks and throwing them in front of the guard post (00:47:25:00)  The new soldier issued the challenge word, the other soldier did not respond, so the new soldier shot him (00:47:54:00)  Both Groothuis and the other soldier were confined while the situation was investigated (00:48:08:00) For Groothuis’ individual company and battalion, the racial climate was very good and it was never a big deal (00:49:26:00) o The biggest issue was during a promotion board when everyone but the lone African-American was promoted, which upset the African-American; however, it was an honest test and the African-American honestly failed it (00:49:37:00) �    o A battalion of Marines eventually moved next to Groothuis’ unit and Groothuis’ first sergeant warned the men that if a Marines cut in line at the PX, then just let it go (00:50:28:00)  It was good advice because the Marines were wound tighter than a drum but after awhile, the tension cooled down (00:50:53:00) o Overall, the racial tension ebbed and flowed (00:51:03:00) Use of illegal and illicit drugs by soldiers was prevalent all over the base (00:51:11:00) o One of the soldiers, instead of getting breakfast after his shift ended, would smoke marijuana in a drain culvert near the barracks (00:51:20:00) o Some of the soldiers would get heroin from nearby villages that was so potent that all the soldiers needed to do was sprinkle the heroin on their cigarettes and smoke it (00:51:34:00) o Because he was a little older, Groothuis was not a victim of drug use; he saved his money and sent it home (00:51:50:00) o In Groothuis’ platoon, he does not believe that the drug use affected their overall performance to any great degree; however, in some of the other platoons, drug use was a detriment (00:52:05:00) Groothuis did not observe much in the way of tension between the soldiers who stayed in the rear area and the soldiers who had to travel to the front lines and the fire bases; however, this was because neither group had much contact with the other (00:52:54:00) o The base at Phu Bai was not an R&R area for front line soldiers to rest at; those bases were further to the north; around Phu Bai were largely more permanent bases, with a large motor pool and the I Corps headquarters (00:53:03:00) Groothuis did not often travel off of the base because he had no reason to travel off the base (00:53:36:00) o One soldier went to a village looking for company and the get a hair cut and after the hair cut, the barber slit the soldier’s throat (00:53:44:00) o There was also a large number of STDs and given his conservative Dutch upbringing in west Michigan, they scared Groothuis (00:53:53:00) o When soldiers did go off the base, it was not for very long because at night, sappers would try to attack the main gate (00:54:10:00)  Once, a couple of soldiers went into town to eat at a restaurant and they came back sicker than dogs (00:54:23:00)  The Americans owned the city by day but at night, the Viet Cong took over control (00:54:33:00) o During one sapper attack, the sappers made it as far as the front gate and were tossing their satchel charges over (00:54:44:00) Towards the end of April, a runner came looking for Groothuis to tell him that a message was waiting for him from the Red Cross; when Groothuis read the message, he found out his son had been born (00:55:32:00) o A couple of times, Groothuis was able to call home using the MARS (Military Associated Radio Stations) system (00:55:50:00)  Once, Groothuis tried to say where he was stationed but a soldier monitoring the call said that Groothuis was not allowed to tell his wife that information (00:56:09:00) �  One time, Groothuis needed to go on sick call because he had an upper respiratory infection, so he received permission to visit a small MASH (Mobile Army Surgical Hospital) set up in a tent (00:56:28:00) o When he walked into the tent, Groothuis saw the doctor working on a child that had been run over by an Army truck (00:56:46:00) o The doctor ended up being a Dutchman from Wisconsin and he offered to spend time with Groothuis when he got off-duty, which Groothuis accepted (00:57:41:00) When he first arrived in country, Groothuis was unable to attend church services until he learned the ropes of his job (00:58:33:00) o Although Groothuis did eventually go a couple of times, the services were very unlike the ones back in Michigan; still, they were better than nothing (00:58:57:00) Return / Post-Military Life (00:59:23:00)  Groothuis knew the date he was leaving Vietnam, November 4th, for some time, so on the 4th, he went to the orderly room, where the first sergeant told him to come back the following day (00:59:23:00) o Groothuis went back the next day and the first sergeant told him that he needed to go visit several different people; the CO also offered six thousand dollars tax-free if Groothuis would re-enlist for another six years, but Groothuis respectfully declined, saying he had a family at home he needed to get back to (00:59:35:00) o After processing out, Groothuis flew out the next day on a flight to Da Nang; from Da Nang, he flew to Cam Ranh Bay (01:00:02:00) o In Cam Ranh Bay, Groothuis boarded a plane with soldiers who he had spent his entire time in the military with (01:00:13:00)  From Cam Ranh Bay, Groothuis arrived back at Fort Lewis, Washington; throughout the day, the soldiers processed out, including receiving their final pay and a plane ticket (01:00:32:00)  It got to around eleven o’clock at night and although there was an offer to spend the night at the base, Groothuis and another soldier took a cab to United Airlines, where they learned there was a flight to Chicago leaving in ten minutes (01:00:50:00) o When the flight arrived in Chicago, Groothuis decided to call his wife to let her know he was back in the United States (01:01:18:00) o Once Groothuis arrived at the airport in Grand Rapids, his wife, six-month old son, parents, and in-laws were all waiting for him (01:01:38:00)  When Groothuis arrived in Washington, the animosity towards the servicemen was not that bad yet; if there were any demonstrators, Groothuis did not see them because he and the other soldier ran from the cab to the airport (01:02:09:00)  While he was in Vietnam, Groothuis received a lot of support from back home, including letters from two older ladies who had done the same thing for his father-in-law (01:03:36:00) o As well, he was fortunate to be working for a good employer because when Groothuis received his draft notice, his boss to him that when he returned, his job would be waiting for him (01:04:01:00) �      In the first couple of days that followed his return, individuals kept coming over to Groothuis’ apartment to welcome him home (01:04:17:00) o It took Groothuis about a week to readjust to civilian life, after which he called his old boss, who told Groothuis that they had been waiting for him (01:04:40:00) o Groothuis goofed off for the month of November but when December rolled around, he went back to the same job he had before enlisting (01:04:56:00) By in large, Groothuis did not talk with others about his experiences in Vietnam; one of Groothuis’ customers had also served in Vietnam and the two men made a compact to never talk about their experiences (01:05:15:00) o Within the past five years, Groothuis is able to talk about his experiences without become too emotional (01:05:30:00) When he returned home, Groothuis carried both physical and emotional baggage, including exposure to Agent Orange, which involved contacting the Veterans Administration (VA) (01:06:07:00) When Groothuis arrived in Vietnam, he knew that in one year’s time, he would be going home, which was a nice feeling; on the other hand, soldiers today do not have that sort of luxury (01:08:15:00) Serving in the military was a tempering experience for Groothuis; he was a young Dutch kid raised in the culture of conservative west Michigan and serving in the military wised him up very fast (01:09:04:00) o It was the same experience for Groothuis’ wife, who, while Groothuis was stationed at Fort Gordon, got a job working in a grocery store that had segregated bathrooms, something neither of they could believe still existed (01:09:18:00) o Prior to his time in the military, all of Groothuis’ friends, contacts, and acquaintances came from a very specific culture but serving in the military cause him to have a greater appreciation for his country and made him realize that just because someone came from a different culture does not mean they were a bad person (01:10:05:00) o Groothuis believes that his service strengthened his faith, although it caused him to doubt several times in different situations (01:10:53:00) Presently, Groothuis and his wife work as part of a disaster relief group working out of Grand Rapids (01:11:49:00) o As part of the group, Groothuis and his wife have been to the Gulf region at least a dozen times, to North Carolina, to Washington state, and to California amongst other places (01:12:35:00) o When Groothuis first joined the group, he worked in both Turkey and Kosovo as part of international relief efforts (01:14:13:00) � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Groothuis, Larry (Interview outline and video), 2011 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Groothuis, Larry Description An account of the resource Larry Groothuis was born in Grand Rapids, Michigan in 1943. He was drafted into the Army late in 1966. During basic training at Fort Knox, Kentucky, he was selected to go to Fort Gordon, Georgia, for training as a teletype operator, and from there was sent to Fort Huachuca, Arizona, where he served until late in 1967, when his communications company received orders for Vietnam. The unit went by ship, arriving in Vietnam in January, just before the Tet Offensive. His unit initially coordinated communications between the 1st Cavalry Division and other units while based at An Khe, but soon moved north to Phu Bai, and Groothuis was promoted and put in charge of the communications net for all of I Corps. He remained at Phu Bai for the rest of his tour, but made regular trips to other bases by helicopter with his company commander, and also periodically traveled with road convoys simply to get off the base. The base itself was relatively secure, but subject to regular mortar and rocket attacks, one of which killed one of his friends, and periodic sapper attacks. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Michigan--History, Military Veterans Video recordings United States. Army Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2011-06-17 Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GroothuisL1119V Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/01fb029b393a32def70631e8ec754768.pdf dcd043a21eb12773246220e90eb740d7 PDF Text Text The Religious Quest: Groping for the God in Whom We Live and Move and Have Our Being Richard A. Rhem Lakeshore Interfaith Community, Mother’s Trust Ganges, Michigan September 26, 2010 Prepared text of the sermon On April 29 I e-mailed our gracious host, Tapas, today’s theme. He began very early to harass me for the three themes for the summer series. (I don’t mention that after receiving them he loses them!) This is what I e-mailed him: Good morning, Tapas. ...after sleepless nights, much prayer and fasting, coming to the brink of despair, here is the third installment…(Well that may be a bit overdrawn. One shouldn’t be frivolous about things of ultimate concern!): The Religious Quest: groping for the God in whom we live and move and have our being. What has Athens to say to Jerusalem and vice versa? What has the premodern to say to the modern and vice versa? What has the post-modern to say to the modern and vice versa? A fascinating dimension of human reality is the God question or the religious question or the spiritual quest and question. Perhaps we can come to some clarity about our present as we review and reflect on the way we as humans have evolved in our search for meaning, for a place where our heart can rest and our mind remain open – a place of spiritual peace and intellectual integrity, the consequence of which would be global community marked by compassion. Last month my theme was “Whose Truth Are You Living? By What Authority?” I’m trying to recall what moved me in that direction. I had addressed those questions in sermons in the past, but I think the immediate catalyst was the novel I referred to last month, Herman Hesse’s Siddhartha, the story of a young Brahmin who strikes out on a journey to find the truth. From asceticism to lust and ease to coming finally to his own Truth out of despair and solitude, Siddhartha found his soul. Though he greatly admired the Buddha whom he met, he realized simply following the Buddha’s teaching was not enough, for his breakthrough insight was that experience – the experience of enlightenment – cannot be taught. It must come to one amidst the quest – an epiphany in which one “sees,” one “knows” beyond any rational or dogmatic system. © Grand Valley State University   �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 2   The reason I wondered about what made me write the paragraph above is because since deciding on that theme I have been introduced and have read the following books: The Language God Talks, Herman Wouk; This Is My God, Herman Wouk; The Fingerprints of God, Barbara Hagerty; How God Changes Your Brain, Andrew Newberg and Mark Waldman; The Case for God, Karen Armstrong. With the exception of Karen Armstrong’s The Case for God, I had never heard of the four books nor did I go looking for them as references for today. What is almost spooky to me is that I wrote the above paragraph, I suppose, because it is and has long been the quest of my whole being, and then am introduced to those five volumes, all of which speak to my announced theme. Had I had the books in my possession, had I read them before I wrote the paragraph, the theme announced today would have reflected those resources to which to turn. But to announce a theme and then stumble on such rich resources is quite remarkable. Serendipity? Providence? Or maybe there is a God who watches over poor preachers on the edge of senility. Actually I go into this because the recent reading I’ve done has raised some fascinating questions about the human mind or soul and the dimension of Mystery that lies beyond our capacity to know through the exercise of our reason, our rational faculties. Is there a “knowing” beyond knowing? In ordinary lives, our space and time world? That is, is there more to reality than can be accessed by the use of human reason? In light of my experience just related, was there something at work in me beyond that of which I was aware when I decided to address the ancient question, “What has Athens to say to Jerusalem?” I am not at all aware of being, nor have I ever claimed to be, clairvoyant. As for mystical experience, my confession has always been I’ve never had a tingle in my pinkie. Yet I confess I am beginning to wonder. It could be pure coincidence that I write a paragraph about what I want to address five months later and then, without making any effort, I am introduced to five books that address my question more fully and poignantly than I could ever imagine. And it is not simply the “coincidence” to which I am pointing but that the respective books moved me in a direction that causes me even to raise this question. In other words, I got more than I bargained for and find myself quite surprised. It has made me go back over the years and reflect on the way I have come. © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 3   I have spoken of the struggle I had come to after seven years of pastoral ministry. My theology did not fit life as I was experiencing it as a pastor. My European study was an attempt to gain the education I had been too closed to gain while in college and seminary. I quake today as I realize I took my family including three small children to Europe, having arranged for a short-term lease on an apartment in Dordrecht knowing I would not remain there because there was no university there, but not knowing where I would go. A couple months before we left for The Netherlands I met Professor Hendrikus Berkhof at Kennedy airport in New York. Jammed into a shuttle that took him from one terminal to another, we talked about the possibility of studying with him at Leiden. That was my only contact with him. He gave me his telephone number and invited me to call him when I arrived in The Netherlands, which I did. We made an appointment. I relate this because of an experience I had the day I met him in his study which was in his home. As I got up to leave, I noticed a piece of paper pinned on the drape that separated the study from the rest of the house. On the paper was a verse printed on a mimeograph machine – in typical blue ink like I had used in grade school. The lines were from Alfred Lord Tennyson’s hymn “Strong Son of God, Immortal Love:” Our little systems have their day; They have their day and cease to be; They are but broken lights of Thee, And thou, O Lord, art more than they. I get goose bumps relating the incident because that day I knew I had found my teacher and today I can tell you those lines express beautifully and concisely what I experienced over the following four years of graduate study and the subsequent forty years of my theological, philosophical, spiritual quest to the present. Those lines were an illumination for me in a deeply personal, spiritual expression. My freedom to wonder, to probe, to re-imagine came through lines that were a prayer, indeed, a personal address to God. The other evening as the sun was setting in golden glory I was, as usual, sitting on our bluff overlooking Lake Michigan, and I began to sing those beloved lines. I became so aware of the significance of my “chance” reading of those lines on my Professor’s study drape and of this presentation this morning where I would attempt to speak of the God in whom we live and move and have our being. The God in whom we live and move and have our being. That is from St. Paul recorded in Acts 17:28 quoting “some of your own poets”– the intellectuals of Athens gathered on Mars Hill to hear what St. Paul had to say about Jesus and the resurrection. He was preaching the Gospel – “telling the good news about Jesus and the resurrection.” In his commentary on Acts, William Barclay paints the picture: © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 4   Athens had long since left behind her great days of action but she was still the greatest university town in the world, to which men seeking learning came from all over the world. She was a city of many gods. It was said that there were more statues of the gods in Athens than in all the rest of Greece put together, and that in Athens it was easier to meet a god than a man. In the great city square people met to talk, for in Athens they did little else. The days of action were past and now man talked all day and half the night about the newest idea. So Paul would have no difficulty in getting someone to talk to. The philosophers discovered him. There were the Epicureans. We may sum up their beliefs in this way. (i) They believed that everything happened by chance. (ii) They believed that death was the end of all. (iii) They believed that there were gods but the gods were remote from the world and did not care. (iv) They believed that pleasure was the chief end of man. They did not mean fleshly and worldly and material pleasure; for the highest pleasure was the pleasure that brought no pain to follow. There were the Stoics. We may sum up their beliefs in this way. (i) They believed that literally everything was God. God was fiery spirit. That spirit grew blunt and dull in matter but it was in everything. What gave men life was that a little spark of that spirit dwelt in them and when they died it returned to God. But for the Stoic everything was God. (ii) They believed that everything was fated because everything was the will of God; and therefore whatever happened we must not care. It is God’s will and must be accepted. (iii) They believed that every so many years the world disintegrated in a conflagration and then started all over again on the same story. They took Paul to the Areopagus which is the Greek for Mars’ Hill. It was the name both of the hill and the court that met on it. I selected this story from Acts because one finds set forth there two philosophical schools of thought and, over against those two Greek philosophical schools, the proclamation of the gospel of Jesus Christ, a religious/spiritual expression by St. Paul. Thus philosophical discourse engaging religious claim and vice versa. My intention is not to focus on Paul’s claim nor the philosophical discussions of the Epicureans and Stoics. Rather I use this passage from Acts to indicate the setting and background of the famous question raised by the Early Church Father Tertullian – “What does Athens have to do with Jerusalem?” Tertullian was a lawyer who converted to Christ before the end of the second century C.E. One citation will give a sense of Tertullian’s thinking. For philosophy is the material of the world’s wisdom, the rash interpreter of the nature and dispensation of God. Indeed heresies are themselves instigated by philosophy. What indeed has Athens to do with Jerusalem? What has the Academy to do with the Church? What have heretics to do with Christians? Our instruction comes from the porch of Solomon, who © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 5   had himself taught that the Lord should be sought in simplicity of heart. Away with all attempts to produce a Stoic, Platonic, and dialectic Christianity! We want no curious disputation after possessing Christ Jesus, no inquisition after receiving the gospel! When we believe, we desire no further belief. For this is our first article of faith, that there is nothing which we ought to believe besides. (Tertullian, Heretics, (Stevenson, 166-167) from Phoenicia.org. There you have it – two thousand years ago, the Jewish/Christian theologian, Paul, in the wake of his experience of the risen, ascended Jesus whom he now believed to be the Christ, the Messiah, engaged with the intellectuals of Athens – the greatest university city in the world – in dialogue/debate/conversation about God – he speaking from the Revelation he had experienced and clung to in faith, and the Athenians, in customary mode, weighing his claims in the context of the long tradition of Greek philosophical inquiry through the exercise of human reason. And a century and a half later the Latin lawyer from Carthage, Tertullian, drew the line sharply – an either/or – human reason expressed in philosophical categories had no place in Gospel given by revelation and embraced by faith. And of course the God question didn’t arise with Paul in Athens two thousand years ago. On Mars Hill he cites the Greeks’ own poets – a tradition stemming back to earlier centuries – the Epicureans claiming the human existence ended in extinction or the Stoics looking to eventual absorption into God. And how long before that was the mark of the human that he or she was groping for God? Perhaps with the dawn of human consciousness, the earliest beginning of selfconsciousness, of awareness, of awe and wonder before the presence of the Mystery of Being. As indicated above, when I wrote the paragraph announcing today’s theme, I had not read Karen Armstrong’s The Case for God. But reading it I found she has addressed precisely my questions following on “What has Athens to say to Jerusalem?”: “What has the pre-modern to say to the modern and vice versa?; “What has the post-modern to say to the modern and vice versa?” And further, she addresses explicitly what I hoped would be the result of our inquiry – to come to some clarity about our present…our search for meaning, for a place where our heart can rest and our mind remain open – a place of spiritual peace and intellectual integrity. That search has marked my whole life since opening up to critical thinking in regard to my religious faith. The “heart” and “mind” issue was articulated most concisely for me in a little work on Christology by Professor John Knox –The Humanity and Divinity of Christ. I refer to it here not because the Christological discussion – a discussion of the pre-existence of Jesus – is relevant to our theme, © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 6   but because Knox expressed so clearly the human quest for understanding that engages both heart and mind when confronted with a religious claim beyond human reason. If neither the rejection nor the modification of kenosis is a possibility for us, nor yet its acceptance as a plain statement of fact, it is clear that we must receive the story as story and then interpret it as best we can, in rational and empirical terms, knowing all the while that we shall not exhaust in our interpretation what the story says and only the story can say, but also knowing that without the effort at interpretation the story will say precisely nothing at all. For a story like this can speak to us of matters beyond our understanding only if it has also spoken to our understanding – and, within the limits of our powers, been understood. There are two conditions under which a significant symbol loses (or, perhaps better, is shown to have lost) its vitality and power. One of these is when our hearts no longer need it, when all we want to say or need to say (or to have said to us) can be said without it. The other is when our minds, failing to discern in it the coherency of truth, are forced to reject it. For our hearts cannot finally find true what our minds find false. If they could, we should be hopelessly divided and any firm grasp of reality would be impossible. What we mean by ‘the heart’ in this connection is not something alien or counter to the mind, but is the mind itself quickened and extended. The wisdom the heart has found, if it be wisdom and not fantasy, is the same wisdom the mind all the while has been feeling after, if haply it might find it. It is a wisdom which, far from by-passing the understanding, enters through the doors of it, fills and stretches the space of it, and only then breaks through and soars above it. (The Humanity and Divinity of Christ, p. 106f) It was Eastertide, 1992, and my sermon series was “From Proclaimer to the One Proclaimed” and I was struggling with the Christological puzzle. In his little volume Knox charted the early Church’s attempts to express the mystery of Jesus Christ, resurrected, ascended Lord. That was very helpful for me but the real “gift” was his statement, For our hearts cannot finally find true what our minds find false. A similar statement, his or some other’s, states it simply as The heart cannot rest where the mind cannot follow. If John Knox put the matter concisely, Karen Armstrong puts the God question, the whole human spiritual endeavor, in the context of the whole human story in her The Case for God. The persons, schools, movements to which she points and which she discusses have long been familiar to me through long years of © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 7   theological work. But the picture she paints, the story she tells casts a fresh light on the whole human effort of “groping after God.” The book is divided into two parts. Part I deals with “The Unknown God,” covering the centuries from 30,000 B.C.E. to 1500 C.E. Part II explains “The Modern God” (1500 C.E. to the present). Each part is divided into six chapters and there is an Introduction and Epilogue. There is a richness and fullness in the story she tells and I will in no way give a full analysis of the work. What I do hope to do is lift up what is so striking in her work as it relates to our present theme – the relation of the heart to the mind, faith to reason, religion as a way of life and practice and religion as a rational dogmatic system to be assented to by our reason. With voluminous documentation, Armstrong establishes her major thesis that historically, from the earliest evidence of religious activity until the advent of the modern period, religious practice as ritual found transcendence in myth. She notes that many date the beginning of the modern period with Columbus’ voyage in 1492. While still a solidly Christian nation with Catholic monarchs, Spain was in an age of transition. Armstrong writes, The people of Europe had started their journey to modernity, but the traditional myths of religion still gave meaning to their rational and scientific explorations. (p. 162) But that would change in the Renaissance, the Protestant Reformation, the Catholic Counter-Reformation and the early breakthroughs in the investigations of the natural sciences, for example the work of Copernicus, Kepler and Galileo. Armstrong gives a rich picture of the interplay of reforming religion – Catholic and Protestant and the unlocking of the secrets of the universe. I have moved quickly from the earliest evidence of human religious practice to the beginnings of the modern period, because it was at that point that religious practice changed. And it is the change of religious practice that has brought us to the present unhappy place of aggressive, dogmatic fundamentalism and equally aggressive, militant atheism. Our author sets the stage for this unfortunate religious development in the Introduction with reference to the two ways of thinking, speaking and acquiring knowledge in the premodern cultures: In most premodern cultures, there were two recognized ways of thinking, speaking, and acquiring knowledge. The Greeks called them mythos and logos. Both were essential and neither was considered superior to the other; they were not in conflict but complementary. Each had its own sphere of competence, and it was considered unwise to mix the two. Logos (“reason”) was the pragmatic mode of thought that enabled people to function effectively in the world. It had, therefore, to correspond accurately to external reality. People have always needed logos to make an © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 8   efficient weapon, organize their societies, or plan an expedition. Logos was forward-looking, continually on the lookout for new ways of controlling the environment, improving old insights, or inventing something fresh. Logos was essential to the survival of our species. But it had its limitations: it could not assuage human grief or find ultimate meaning in life’s struggles. For that people turned to mythos or “myth.” Today we live in a society of scientific logos, and myth has fallen into disrepute. In popular parlance, a “myth” is something that is not true. But in the past, myth was not self-indulgent fantasy; rather, like logos, it helped people to live effectively in our confusing world, though in a different way. Myths may have told stories about the gods, but they were really focused on the more elusive, puzzling, and tragic aspects of the human predicament that lay outside the remit of logos. Myth has been called a primitive form of psychology. When a myth described heroes threading their way through labyrinths, descending into the underworld, or fighting monsters, these were not understood as primarily factual stories. They were designed to help people negotiate the obscure regions of the psyche, which are difficult to access but which profoundly influence our thought and behavior. People had to enter the warren of their own minds and fight their personal demons. When Freud and Jung began to chart their scientific search for the soul, they instinctively turned to these ancient myths. A myth was never intended as an accurate account of a historical event; it was something that had in some sense happened once but that also happens all the time. (p. xi) This is not new information from Karen Armstrong. She gives a full treatment of the role of mythology in her A Short History of Myth (2005). But she brings us to our present situation in regard to theology and institutional religious practice by documenting the place of logos and mythos. She points out that a myth was not something one simply “believed in.” It became effective only as a program of action. “It could put you in the correct spiritual or psychological posture, but it was up to you to take the next step and make the ‘truth’ of the myth a reality in your own life.” (p. xii) But if we failed to apply it to our situation, a myth would remain abstract and incredible. From a very early date, people reenacted their myths in stylized ceremonies that worked aesthetically upon participants and, like any work of art, introduced them to a deeper dimension of existence. Myth and ritual were thus inseparable, so much so that it is often a matter of scholarly debate which came first: the mythical story or the rites attached to it. Without ritual, myths made no sense and would remain as opaque as a musical score, which is impenetrable to most of us until interpreted instrumentally. © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page 9   Religion, therefore, was not primarily something that people thought but something they did. Its truth was acquired by practical action. It is no use imagining that you will be able to drive a car if you simply read the manual or study the rules of the road. You cannot learn to dance, paint, or cook by perusing texts or recipes. (p. xii) It is this perspective Karen Armstrong brings to the whole purview of religious history. The insight, wisdom and comfort of good religions is not the result of believing certain ‘truths” or creedal propositions but disciplined practice. She points to the musician lost in her music or the dancer inseparable from the dance – a satisfaction, she contends, that goes deeper than merely “feeling good.” It can lead to “ekstasis”– a “stepping outside” the norm. Religion is a practical discipline that teaches us to discover new capacities of mind and heart. This will be one of the major themes of this book. It is no use magisterially weighing up the teachings of religion to judge their truth or falsehood before embarking on a religious way of life. You will discover their truth – or lack of it – only if you translate these doctrines into ritual or ethical action. Like any skill, religion requires perseverance, hard work, and discipline. Some people will be better at it than others, some appallingly inept, and some will miss the point entirely. But those who do not apply themselves will get nowhere at all. Religious people find it hard to explain how their rituals and practices work, just as a skater may not be fully conscious of the physical laws that enable her to glide over the ice on a thin blade. (p. xiii) For those who engage in religious practice – meditating, participation in liturgy and ritual-witness to the discovery of a transcendent dimension of life - that has been a fact of human life, but it was impossible to explain what that transcendent dimension was in terms of logos. However, she writes: This imprecision was not frustrating, as a modern Western person might imagine, but brought with it an ekstasis that lifted practitioners beyond the constricting confines of self. Our scientifically oriented knowledge seeks to master reality, explain it, and bring it under the control of reason, but a delight in unknowing has also been part of the human experience. Even today, poets, philosophers, mathematicians, and scientists find that the contemplation of the insoluble is a source of joy, astonishment, and contentment. Armstrong cites the early Daoists who saw religion as a “knack” acquired by constant practice. Speaking of our own situation, she suggests we have not been doing our practice and have lost the “knack” of religion. The origin of our dilemma lies in the modern period. © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page10   During the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, a time that historians call the early modern period, Western people began to develop an entirely new kind of civilization, governed by scientific rationality and based economically on technology and capital investment. Logos achieved such spectacular results that myth was discredited and the scientific method was thought to be the only reliable means of attaining truth. This would make religion difficult, if not impossible. As theologians began to adopt the criteria of science, the mythos of Christianity were interpreted as empirically, rationally, and historically verifiable and forced into a style of thinking that was alien to them. Philosophers and scientists could no longer see the point of ritual, and religious knowledge became theoretical rather than practical. We lost the art of interpreting the old tales of gods walking the earth, dead men striding out of tombs, or seas parting miraculously. We began to understand concepts such as faith, revelation, myth, mystery, and dogma in a way that would have been very surprising to our ancestors. In particular, the meaning of the word “belief” changed, so that a credulous acceptance of creedal doctrines became the prerequisite of faith, so much so that today we often speak of religious people as “believers,” as though accepting orthodox dogma “on faith” were their most important activity. (p. xv) That paragraph really expresses the heart of Armstrong’s contention as she addresses our contemporary situation with The Case for God. She does a marvelous job of describing the rise of modernity as it emerged from the late medieval period – the early development of the scientific method, the inductive method of empirical research and experimentation. She chronicles with clarity the triumph of logos in the mastering of the natural world, the growing consensus that logos was the sole means of acquiring true knowledge and how, in turn, the theologians sought by means of rational thought to express religious truth. Such a move by the religious scholars to abandon mythical thinking and seek to establish God-talk and spiritual reality by means of the canons of human reason – while understandable given the climate of opinion of modernity, especially the Enlightenment – was a disaster for it is an impossibility. And, further, it has led to the rejection of the spiritual dimension of our human experience and the abandonment of religious practice wherein the human family had found hope, comfort and healing. She describes the consequences of the move in the modern age of religious discourse from myth to reason. This rationalized interpretation of religion has resulted in two distinctively modern phenomena: fundamentalism and atheism. The two are related. The defensive piety popularly known as fundamentalism erupted in almost every major faith during the twentieth century. In their desire to produce a wholly rational, scientific faith that abolished mythos in favor of logos, Christian fundamentalists have interpreted scripture with a literalism that © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page11   is unparalleled in the history of religion. In the United States, protestant fundamentalists have evolved an ideology known as “creation science” that regards the mythoi of the Bible as scientifically accurate. They have, therefore, campaigned against the teaching of evolution in the public schools, because it contradicts the creation story in the first chapter of Genesis. (p.xv) Armstrong points out that atheism is rarely “a blanket denial of the sacred per se” but most often a rejection of some particular conception of the Divine. This can be demonstrated in the rise of classical Western atheism of the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries as well as its present expression. Atheism is therefore parasitically dependent on the form of theism it seeks to eliminate and becomes its reverse mirror image. Classical Western atheism was developed during the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries by Feuerbach, Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud, whose ideology was essentially a response to and dictated by the theological perception of God that had developed in Europe and the United States during the modern period. The more recent atheism of Richard Dawkins, Christopher Hitchens, and Sam Harris is rather different, because it has focused exclusively on the God developed by the fundamentalisms, and all three insist that fundamentalism constitutes the essence and core of all religion. This has weakened their critique, because fundamentalism is in fact a defiantly unorthodox form of faith that frequently misrepresents the tradition it is trying to defend. But the “new atheists” command a wide readership, not only in secular Europe but even in the more conventionally religious United States. The popularity of their books suggests that many people are bewildered and even angered by the God concept they have inherited. (p. xvi) But the whole broad picture of human knowing has undergone and is undergoing a major shift in understanding. Our era has no name except “post-modernity”. Obviously the label points to the contention that we as a human family in the pursuit of truth, knowledge of our world, have moved beyond the assumptions of the modern age with its certainty of logos as the only and final arbiter of truth. She explains: Philosophy, theology, and mythology have always responded to the science of the day, and a philosophical movement has developed since the 1980s that has embraced the indeterminacy of the new cosmology. Postmodern thinking is heir to Hume and Kant in its assumption that what we call reality is constructed by the mind and that all human understanding is therefore interpretation rather than the acquisition of accurate, objective information. From this it follows that no single vision can be sovereign; that our knowledge is relative, subjective, and fallible rather than certain and absolute; and that truth is inherently ambiguous. Received ideas that © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page12   are the products of a particular historical and cultural milieu must, therefore, be stringently deconstructed. But this analysis must not be based on any absolute principle, and there is no assurance that we will ever arrive at – or even approximate – a wholly accurate version of the truth. Fundamental to postmodern thought is the conviction that instead of ideologies mirroring external conditions, the world is profoundly affected by the ideology that human beings impose upon it. We are not forced by sense data to adopt a particular worldview, so we have a choice in what we affirm – as well as an immense responsibility. (p. 311) That is a major shift! Armstrong cites an Italian postmodernist, Vattimo, who has focused on the French thinker Derrida’s later work. Vattimo argues that from the beginning religion had recognized that it was “an essentially interpretive discourse: it had traditionally proceeded by endless deconstructing its sacred texts, so that from the start it had the potential to liberate itself from metaphysical orthodoxy.” ( p. 313) Modernity, Vattimo believes, is over; when we contemplate history, we cannot now see the future as an inevitable and unilinear progression toward emancipation. Freedom no longer lies in the perfect knowledge of and conformity to the necessary structure of reality, but in an appreciation of multiple discourses and the historicity, contingency, and finitude of all religious, ethical, and political values – including our own. (p. 314) Postmodernity, the American philosopher John D. Caputo contends, should be “a more enlightened Enlightenment, that is no longer taken in by the dream of pure objectivity.” Armstrong concludes her chapter on “Death of God?” quoting Caputo: If modern atheism is the rejection of a modern God, then the delimitation of modernity opens up another possibility, less the resuscitation of premodern theism than the chance of something beyond both the theism and the atheism of modernity. (p. 317) Armstrong concludes the section, “…how best can we move beyond premodern theism into a perception of ”God” that truly speaks to all the complex realities and needs of our time?” And she begins her Epilogue with the statement, “Religion was never supposed to provide answers to questions that lay within the reach of human reason.” (p. 318) Underscoring the point made throughout the study, “Religion is a practical discipline, and its insights are not derived from abstract speculation but from spiritual exercises and a dedicated lifestyle.” (p. 318) But she anticipates the question that will inevitably arise – “Are we doomed to the perpetual regression of postmodern thought?” (p. 327) She answers, © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page13   Perhaps the only viable “natural theology” lies in religious experience. By this, of course, I do not mean fervid emotional piety. We have seen that in the past scholars and spiritual directors had little time for this religious positivism. Instead of seeking out exotic raptures, Schleiermacher, Bultmann, Rahner, and Lonergan have all suggested that we should explore the normal workings of our minds and notice how frequently these propel us quite naturally into transcendence. Instead of looking for what we call God “outside ourselves” (foris) in the cosmos, we should, like Augustine, turn within and become aware of the way quite ordinary responses segue into “otherness.” We have seen how the inherent finitude of language was regularly exploited by teachers like Denys to make the faithful aware of the silence we encounter on the other side of speech. It has been well said that music, which, as we saw at the beginning of this book, is a “definitively” rational activity, is itself a “natural theology.” In music the mind experiences a pure, direct emotion that transcends ego and fuses subjectivity and objectivity. As Basil explained, we can never know the ineffable ousia of God but can glimpse only its traces or effects (energeiai) in our time-bound, sensebound world. It is clear that the meditation, yoga, and rituals that work aesthetically on a congregation have, when practiced assiduously over a lifetime, a marked effect on the personality – an effect that is another form of natural theology. There is no dramatic “born-again” conversion but a slow, incremental, and imperceptible transformation. Above all, the habitual practice of compassion and the Golden Rule “all day and every day” demands perpetual kenosis. The constant “stepping outside” of our own preferences, convictions, and prejudices is an ekstasis that is not a glamorous rapture but, as Confucius’s pupil Yan Hui explained, is itself the transcendence we seek. The effect of these practices cannot give us concrete information about God; it is certainly not a scientific “proof.” But something indefinable happens to people who involve themselves in these disciplines with commitment and talent. This “something” remains opaque to those who do not undergo these disciplines, however, just as the Eleusinian “mystery” sounded trivial and absurd to somebody who remained obstinately outside the cult hall and refused to undergo the initiation. ( p. 327f) In these two citations, Armstrong readily acknowledges that these practices give us no “concrete information about God”– no scientific “proof.” Nonetheless she points to the effects of the disciplined practice of religious exercises. That that is in fact the case has been documented. As I began I listed the books that fell serendipitously into my hands. One of them by Andrew Newberg and Mark Waldman is entitled How God Changes Your Brain. It is beyond my purpose to deal with the neurological research set forth in this work. The author’s research gives them no basis for affirming or denying the existence of God. What © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page14   they do do as neural scientists is map the brain registering the physical response in the brains of various persons and groups as they are actually engaged in meditation, contemplation – in some form of spiritual practice. In the opening pages of the book, Newberg gives a concise summary of what he and his colleagues are about. Along with my research staff at the University of Pennsylvania and the Center for Spirituality and the Mind, we are currently studying Sikhs, Sufis, yoga practitioners, and advanced meditators to map the neurochemical changes caused by spiritual and religious practices. Our research has led us to the following conclusions: 1. Each part of the brain constructs a different perception of God. 2. Every human brain assembles its perceptions of God in uniquely different ways, thus giving God different qualities of meaning and value. 3. Spiritual practices, even when stripped of religious beliefs, enhance the neural functioning of the brain in ways that improve physical and emotional health. 4. Intense, long-term contemplation of God and other spiritual values appears to permanently change the structure of those parts of the brain that control our moods, give rise to our conscious notions of self, and shape our sensory perceptions of the world. 5. Contemplative practices strengthen a specific neurological circuit that generates peacefulness, social awareness, and compassion for others. Spiritual practices also can be used to enhance cognition, communication, and creativity, and over time can even change our neurological perception of reality itself. Yet, it is a reality that we cannot objectively confirm. Instead, our research has led us to conclude that three separate realities intermingle to give us a working model of the world: the reality that actually exists outside of our brain, and two internal realities – maps that our brain constructs about the world. One of these maps is subconscious and primarily concerned with survival and the biological maintenance of the body. But this map is not the world itself; it’s just a guide that helps us navigate the terrain. Human beings, however, construct a second internal reality – a map that reflects our conscious awareness of the universe. This consciousness is very different from the subconscious map formed by our sensory and emotional circuits. We know that these two internal maps exist, but we have yet to discover if, and to what degree, these two inner realities communicate with each other. Overall, our consciousness represents a reality that is the farthest removed from the world that actually exists outside of the brain. Thus, if God does © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page15   exist, there would be three separate realities to consider: the God that exists in the world, our subconscious perception of that God, and the conscious images and concepts that we construct in a very small part of our frontal, temporal, and parietal lobes. It has been my goal to show that spiritual practices may help us to bridge the chasm between these inner and outer realities, which would then bring us closer to what actually exists in the world. I still don’t know if it’s possible, but the health benefits associated with meditation and religious ritual cannot be denied. (p. 6) Interestingly, in an Epilogue entitled, “Is God Real?”, Newberg writes more personally about the God question. For those who embark on a spiritual journey, God becomes a metaphor reflecting their personal search for Truth. It is a journey inward toward self-awareness, salvation or enlightenment, and for those who are touched by this mystical experience, life becomes more meaningful and rich. Personally, I believe there has to be an absolute truth about the universe. I don’t know what it is, but I am driven to seek it, using science, philosophy, and spirituality as my guide… …I harbor the hope and feeling that God or some ultimate reality, in whatever form it may take, actually exists. I don’t know if my intuition is true, but I am quite comfortable with my uncertainty. (p. 246) Barbara Bradley Hagerty was not “comfortable with her uncertainty.” She set out on a serious quest to research the God question, engaging with persons who have had experience of another dimension, of God, of being transported into another realm of reality, as well as those pursuing the science of brain research in relation to spiritual experience. She is NPR’s award-winning religion correspondent and was formerly a reporter at the Christian Science Monitor and thus combines a journalist’s research and writing skills. The end product of her intensive research is the book Fingerprints of God (2009). A review in Publishers Weekly expresses the terrain covered by Hagerty concisely. National Public Radio correspondent Hagerty acts as a tour guide through the rocky terrain of scientists who study religious experience. Is there a socalled God gene? Why do some people have mystical experiences while others never see the so-called light? Yet to each interview, whether with a world-renowned neuroscientist or a back-road mystic, [Hagerty] brings a suitably skeptical eye. Along the way, she manages to explain some pretty cutting-edge science – psychoneuroimmunology, anyone? – and unravel some people’s pretty hard-to-comprehend religious experiences without sacrificing depth or complexity. Then, with equal aplomb, she dances off to peyote ceremonies, church service and Alcoholics Anonymous meetings. The real beauty of this book lies in watching Hagerty gracefully balance © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page16   her own trust in faith and science and, in the end, come down with one foot planted firmly in both.” That says it well; this is an exceptional study in my opinion. Seldom has one gone “groping after God” with such passionate engagement combined with intellectual integrity. Barbara Hagerty’s heart would not rest where her mind could not follow. Deep yearning to believe that the experiences of another dimension breaking into our space-time world are indeed the fingerprints of God, has not kept her from asking the tough questions and acknowledging the limits of scientific proof when focused on the question of the existence of God. She finally wrote her book because she couldn’t keep the questions at bay. And yet I could not keep the questions at bay. Is there another reality that occasionally breaks into our world and bends the laws of nature? Is there a being or intelligence who weaves together the living universe, and if so, does He, She, or It fit the description I have been given? I was not worried about losing the old man with a beard – but what about the young man on a cross? Is there a spiritual world every bit as real as the phone ringing in the kitchen or my dog sitting on my foot, a dimension that eludes physical sight and hearing and touch? In the end, my questions boiled down to five words: Is there more than this? (p. 6) Is there more than this? That is the question that drives those who long for some sign of a greater Reality that embraces us, yet insist on living with more than wishful thinking. Barbara Hagerty was raised in a very positive and powerful Christian Science family environment but in her mid-thirties she left the practice of Christian Science, yet holding “to the idea of God, of a creator above and within this messy creation called my life and yours.” Researching a story on the Saddleback Church in California she had a powerful mystical experience – “…I was engulfed by a presence I could feel but not touch…Those few moments, the time it takes to boil water for tea, reoriented my life. The episode left a mark on my psyche that I bear to this day.” (p. 5). And thus her book Fingerprints of God. This book tackles the existence of God, “the reality of the unseen,” as psychologist William James had it. After talking to countless scientists far more knowledgeable and insightful than I, I have concluded that science cannot prove God – but science is entirely consistent with God. It all depends on how you define “God.” If you are trying to locate deity in a thirty-three-year-old carpenter or the unseen divider of the Red Sea, science will offer no help. But if you look for God in the math of the universe, if your perceive God as the Mind that rigged existence to create life, then science can indeed accommodate. If you see God in the breathtaking complexity of our brains, as the architect of our bodies and © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page17   our minds who planted the question Is there more? – well, science has room for that kind of God. (p. 11f) The book deserves a full treatment in its own right but that is beyond the limits of this presentation. I bring in Hagerty’s research and conclusions as a confirmation of all we have learned from Karen Armstrong’s The Case for God. Recounting a great mass of personal experiences she learned of by interviewing persons with spiritual/mystical experiences, Hagerty begins to formulate the conclusions to which she is coming through conversation with a variety of scholars whose focus and research deal with the experiences that break the mold of materialism and its absolute denial of another dimension of reality. From a lecture by Francis Collins, one of the country’s leading geneticists and head of the Human Genome Project, Hagerty writes, “God” may not be, as the atheists have it, a delusion – but perhaps a conclusion driven by the math of the universe. The infinite intelligence that maintains the planets in their orbits and tailors the molecular composition of air to each breath we take – this intelligence is not the figment of a narrow fundamentalist mind but the property of the most rigorous scientific minds. This is a God who makes sense to me, a defensible God, and one who has a starring role in a new batch of scientific experiments. (p. 246) Continuing in this chapter entitled “A New Name for God,” she brings in the ideas of Larry Dossey. Imagine stripping God of all His imagery. Gone is the throne, the beard, the Michelangelo painting of a majestic Being nearly touching Adam’s finger with the spark of life. Gone, too, are the stories of a God who intervened, who favored a certain people, who assumed the physique of a man. This stripped-down version would be the sum of his attributes, which would include infinite information, an omnipresence that fills all space and connects all atoms, a taste for mathematics that keeps the planets in their orbit, and the power to do so. This is a God who might appeal to the concrete thinking of a scientist. I came to think of this as “God 1.0” – God minus the love and the narrative history. Larry Dossey calls this God “non-local mind.” Dossey, a doctor and author, coined the term in his 1989 book Recovering the Soul. It bears more than a smart scientific ring. “Non-locality” is a staple of quantum mechanics, and one of the spookier aspects of physics. For Dossey and others on the edge of science, “non-local mind” refers to a consciousness that defies the bounds of space or time. © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page18   “Perhaps the place to start is to say that non-locality is simply a fancified word for infinitude,” Dossey told me one luminous day in July 2006. “If consciousness is non-local, then it is infinite in space and time. If something is infinite in space, it’s omnipresent. If it’s infinite in time, it’s eternal, or immortal. So you can see that from the get-go there’s theological dynamite that’s hooked up with this idea of non-local mind.” … What he proposes is a revolution in science. If non-local mind were merely the equivalent of the Divine Watchmaker, who created the universe and then let it tick away on its own, the idea would unsettle fewer of his colleagues. But Dossey’s claim is far more galling: he suggests that his non-local mind interacts – has a relationship, even – with a person’s individual, local mind, in the same way that many Christians or Jews believe that God interacts with people. According to Dossey and a growing number of scientists (along with most of the American population), this cosmic consciousness permeates our world and soaks into our human affairs. Think of your “local” mind as your personal computer. You can keep files and write documents that no one else can access. “Non-local” mind is like the Internet: it contains enormous amounts of information, shared by billions of people (potentially by everyone on earth), and is always available for you to access with your individual mind. Dossey theorizes that your consciousness shares qualities with non-local mind, that the local and the infinite are “two sides of the same coin.” This may seem far-fetched until you begin reading the mystics or practicing meditation or listening to anyone who has enjoyed a profoundly spiritual experience. They witness to being “at one” with the universe and God, feeling the boundlessness of the infinite, and experiencing “the divine within.” And if there is a dialogue, so to speak, between your mind and the larger non-local mind, then it follows that your mind could do things that modern science says is impossible, such as impact other minds or know things that you simply should not know. … “One of the things that scientists have had a difficult time doing is to imagine how consciousness might behave non-locally.” Dossey observed. “That it might exert its effects beyond the individual brain and the body, as in the stuff that parapsychology deals with, like ESP, clairvoyance, this sort of thing. And, we must add, intercessory prayer, which has always been a claim of all major religions. So it has been verboten to suggest that this actually happens, that the mind can behave non-locally, because every respectable scientist is dragooned into the notion that, by definition, that can’t happen.” (pp. 246-248) © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page19   Following on her discussion about Dossey, Hagerty relates another fascinating conversation with Dean Radin, a senior scientist at the Institute of Noetic Sciences (IONS). Dean Radin has a hypothesis: We have “entangled minds.” Hagerty quotes Radin. “Early on I was attracted to the notion that there were multiple layers to any story,” he recalled, gazing out his window at the mountains surrounding the IONS compound, a wilderness paradise some forty miles north of San Francisco. “I never forgot that virtually anything that people are presenting to you, even in science, has multiple levels of meaning.” This intuition – that there may be a hidden reality – led Radin to entanglement. The idea of entanglement is this: when you delve down to the subatomic or quantum level, particles remain connected even when they are apparently separated. Albert Einstein called these connections in quantum theory “spooky action at a distance.” When Einstein was alive, entanglement was only an idea that was predicted by mathematics, but it had not yet been demonstrated in the laboratory. That would begin to happen in the 1970s, when researchers first started to explore whether the predicted properties of entanglement could be observed in the laboratory. In a groundbreaking study in the 1980s, French scientist Alain Aspect and his colleagues experimentally caused two photons, or light particles, to become entangled. When a property of light – such as spin, position, or momentum – was measured in one of the particles, the “twin” particle instantly showed the opposite property. What was especially spooky was that distance between particles did not matter. Even though the twins were more than thirty miles apart, they behaved as if they were still connected. They were entangled. Radin is quick to point out that entanglement has been shown only at the subatomic level, and that we human beings are much bigger than that. But since people and things are composed of subatomic particles, Radin argues, entanglement may suggest that everything is interconnected, even people. We are not billiard balls on a pool table that occasionally bump into each other. We are part of a fabric woven so tightly that pulling one thread alters the whole tapestry. Or, try this: Reality is like Jell-O: Poke one side of the bowl and the green stuff on the other side jiggles. According to Dean Radin’s entangled reality, if that “poke” is an event – say, a car accident – information about that event could pop into someone’s head miles away. ( p. 250f) Hagerty tells of attending a conference at Cambridge University in 2005, one of ten seasoned journalists invited by The Templeton Foundation and Cambridge University to observe celebrities in the world of science present their ideas about biology, string theory, and multiverses. The question underlying the © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page20   presentations was: Could God retain a place in the intelligent man’s world? Or, in the scientific age: Has God been reduced to a superstitious belief lacking any rational basis? Hagerty felt after eight days of lectures that God was losing. She writes that she was witnessing a blitzkrieg of scientific materialism overrunning the quaint but untestable claims of God and that irked her. The decks were stacked, the outcome certain. How could it be any different – “The rules of the game – the paradigm of modern science – revolve around certain core beliefs. One of them dictates that scientists can study only what they can measure: The physical world and observable behavior. Try to investigate something that cannot be precisely measured – such as spiritual experience that transforms a person’s life – well, that’s cause for immediate disqualification.” (p. 269) She goes on: Another rule is the mind-brain paradigm: everything we are, see, feel, do, or think is a physical state, the electrical and chemical activity in three pounds of tissue called the brain. Mind, consciousness – forget about the soul – must be reduced to matter. It is a closed loop, excluding any notion of God or a spiritual realm. (p. 269) But then she tells of quite an amazing happening. But on that rainy morning in Cambridge I witnessed something extraordinary, akin to Dorothy spotting the little bald man pulling the levers of the Wizard of Oz. For only a moment, the curtain pulled back and we saw the fight for what it was: two belief systems duking it out. John Barrows, a brilliant Cambridge mathematician, was speed-walking us through the hypothesis of a “fine-tuned” universe that is exquisitely and astonishingly calibrated to allow for life. He explained the concept of “multiverses,” which posits that we live in one of 10,500 universes. Then he said, almost as an aside, “I’m quite happy with a traditional theistic view of the universe.” He might as well have dropped an anvil on Richard Dawkin’s foot. Dawkins is a renowned evolutionary biologist at Oxford University and possibly the world’s most famous atheist, certainly one of the most militant. Two days earlier, Dawkins had delivered a talk that he believed would prove the impossibility of God, and which would later be published as a book called The God Delusion. He had remained in Cambridge to hear the lectures of other researchers, particularly the world-class John Barrow. When Barrow, who turned out to be an Anglican, mentioned his belief in God, Dawkins began roiling with frustration like a teakettle about to blow. “Why on earth do you believe in God? Dawkins blurted. © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page21   All heads turned to Barrow. “If you want to look for divine action, physicists look at the rationality of the universe and the mathematical structure of the world.” “Yes, but why do you want to look for divine action?” Dawkins demanded. “For the same reason that someone might not want to,” Barrow responded with a little smile, as all of us erupted in laughter – except for Dawkins. So there you have it. The paradigm is not a law, it is a choice: a choice to look for – or exclude – the action of a divine intelligence. The paradigm to exclude a divine intelligence, or “Other,” or “God,” to reduce all things to matter, has reigned triumphant for some four hundred years, since the dawn of the Age of Reason. Today, a small yet growing number of scientists are trying to chip away at the paradigm, suspecting that its feet are made of clay. (pp. 269f) After all of her travels, interviews and investigation of mind-brain research, Hagerty came to a place where head and heart could comfortably dwell. This is her witness. I came to define God by His handiwork: a craftsman who builds the hope of eternity into our genes, a master electrician and chemist who outfits our brains to access another dimension, a guru who rewards our spiritual efforts by allowing us to feel united with all things, an intelligence that pervades every atom and every nanosecond, all time and space, in the throes of death or the ecstasy of life. This view of God and spiritual reality offers an alternative to superstition. It allows you to steer through an all-or-nothing attitude – that either there is a God who intervenes, depending on His mood and whether you’ve been naughty or nice; or that “God” is the product of ignorance and we live in a cold, uncaring, random universe. It seems to me that advances in science, and particularly in quantum physics, are offering another description of reality in which all things are guided by and connected to an Infinite Mind. This description, of course, echoes the words of mystics down the ages. (p. 277f) Finally, the originating question, “Is there more than this?” She answers, yes, there is and she believes the new science of spirituality buttresses her instinct that we are crafted with astonishing precision so that we can, on occasion, peer into a spiritual world and know God. This is a place the heart can rest and the mind can follow. And there is more to come! © Grand Valley State University �Religious Quest: Groping for God Richard A. Rhem Page22   References: Karen Armstrong. The Case for God. Thorndike Press, 2009. Barbara Haggerty. Fingerprints of God: The Search for the Science of Spirituality. Riverhead, 2009. Andrew Newberg and Mark Waldman. How God Changes Your Brain: Breakthrough Findings from a Leading Neuroscientist. Ballantine Books, 2009. © Grand Valley State University � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Richard A. Rhem Collection Description An account of the resource Text and sound recordings of the sermons, prayers, services, and articles of Richard Rhem, pastor emeritus of Christ Community Church in Spring Lake, Michigan, where he served for 37 years. Starting in the mid 1980's, Rhem began to question some of the traditional Christian dogma that he had been espousing from the pulpit. That questioning was a first step in a long and interesting spiritual journey, one that he openly shared with his congregation. His journey is important, in part because it is reflective of the questioning, the yearnings, and the gradual revision of beliefs that many persons in this part of the century have experienced and continue to experience. It is important also because of the affirming and inclusive way his questioning was done and his thinking evolved. His sermons and other written and spoken materials together document the steps in his journey as it took a turn in 1985, yet continued to revolve around the framework and liturgies of the Christian calendar. Subject The topic of the resource Clergy--Michigan Reformed Church in America Christ Community Church (Spring Lake, Mich.) Religion Interfaith worship Sermons Sound Recordings Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Rhem, Richard A. Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/514">Richard A. Rhem papers (KII-01)</a> Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Kaufman Interfaith Institute Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Language A language of the resource English Type The nature or genre of the resource Sound Text Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context KII-01 Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1981-2014 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource audio/mp3 text/pdf Sound A resource primarily intended to be heard. Examples include a music playback file format, an audio compact disc, and recorded speech or sounds. Event Lakeshore Interfaith Community Series The Religious Quest Location The location of the interview Lakeshore Interfaith Center, Ganges References Karen Armstrong. The Case for God, 2009. Barbara Bradley Hagerty. Fingerprints of God, 2002, Andrew Newberg and Mark Waldman. How God Changes Your Brain: Breakthrough Findings from a Leading Neuroscientist, 2009. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context KII-01_RA-0-20100926 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2010-09-26 Title A name given to the resource Groping for the God in Whom We Live and Move and Have Our Being Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Richard A. Rhem Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Clergy--Michigan Reformed Church in America Christ Community Church (Spring Lake, Mich.) Sermons Relation A related resource Richard A. Rhem - An Archive of Sermons, Prayers, Talks and Stories: http://richardrhem.org/ Language A language of the resource eng Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Description An account of the resource A sermon given by Richard A. Rhem (Dick) on September 26, 2010 entitled "Groping for the God in Whom We Live and Move and Have Our Being", as part of the series "The Religious Quest", on the occasion of Lakeshore Interfaith Community, at Lakeshore Interfaith Center, Ganges. Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives History of Religion https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/734510d784165f92b6211d026955f8f4.pdf 558f7b78d921b674df3a3108de3aca79 PDF Text Text ADOPTED BY PLANNING COMMISSION JULY 17, 1989 GROSSE ILE TOWNSHIP MASTER PLAN Gerald Luedtke and Associates, Incorporated Urban Planning Consultants Detroit, Michigan �- ----------------.....■ Table of Contents Page LONG-RANGE DEVELOPMENT POLICIES FOR GROSSE ILE TOWNSHIP 1 POPULATION ANALYSIS 6 COMMERCIAL BASE ANALYSIS 26 INDUSTRIAL BASE ANALYSIS 33 THE NATURAL ENVIRONMENT OF GROSSE ILE TOWNSHIP 42 LAND USE 54 TRANSPORTATION 68 COMMUNITY FACILITIES 78 RECREATION 82 �-- List of Figures Page Population Trends in Nearby Communities Population Age Distribution 9 12 School Enrollment 14 List of Maps Grosse Ile Census Tracts 11 Emergent and Forested Wetlands 43 Significant Woodlands and Natural Features 50 Existing Land Use Areas of Historic Significance 55 58 Future Land Use 60 Macomb Road Existing Land Use 64 Traffic Volumes 70 Roadway Classification Map 73 Existing Recreation Facilities 86 �list of Tables Total Population 7 Population Age Distribution 13 Population and Household Projections 23 Holding Capacity of Township Existing and Future Land Use Evaluation of Existing Recreation Facilities and Services Evaluation of Existing Recreation Facilities and Services Based on Age Composition of Households Evaluation of Existing Recreation Facilities and Services Based on Annual Income of Households Support for Recreation and Leisure Programs Support for Recreation and Leisure Programs Based on Age Composition of Households Support for Recreation and Leisure Programs Based on Annual Income of Households Use of Recreation and Leisure Programs Use of Recreation and Leisure Programs Based on Age Composition of the Housholds Use of Recreation and Leisure Programs Based on Annual Income of Households Needed Outdoor Recreation Facilities Needed Outdoor Recreation Facilities Based on Age Composition of Households 23 61 90 91 92 94 95 98 101 102 105 107 109 �LIST OF TABLES CONTINUED Needed Outdoor Recreation Facilities Based on Annual Income of Households Needed Indoor Recreation Facilities Needed Indoor Recreation Facilities Based on Age Composition of Households 110 112 113 Needed Indoor Recreation Facilities Based on Annual Income of Households Favorite Summer Leisure Activities Favorite Winter Leisure Activities Recreation Equipment Owned by Respondents Use of Off-Island Recreation Facilities Suggested Improvements to Recreation Facilities 116 117 119 121 124 �---- - ----------------- 1I Long-Range Development Policies for Grosse lie Township Uesicle11L iul Veveloµnent 1. Grus ~; i: lie . 'l'o\. nship should develop as a predominately single-family t·usidemilli cunmunity. Multiple-family housing should be carefully limited to sites 11/lid, du nut negatively impact on single-family neighborhoods. i. Uotl1 sinyle-family and multiple-family residential develoP71ents should be c.:un:{ul ly designed to preserve and incorporate natural features us an integral µur·t o/ tl,e overull developnent project design \<.herever possible. :1. lk::d<lent iul living areas should be separated from comnercial und industrial by ude4uate land use transitions, open space areas, or provision of sc.:ruening 0r· bufj'ering. u1·eus ,1. V11c.:uid ex i s ls . lcmd on Grosse lie should be subdivided only ,I-hen a definite need !i. 'J'l,c: Ji:wlopnent of residential areas should occur wi t/1 tl,e µr·oper provision of public utilities. u. Ui:siuentiul tllOl'UU!Jh/'(lf'e:s, developnents should not be penetrated in un orderly sequence by major, high volume '/. Ui:siu1.:n£ iul developnent adjacent to the Detroit River should be desiur1ed to µre~urw und enhunce the aesthetic qualities of the rivel'front. ti. lli:dul'ic: stf'uctures and areas on Grosse Ile should be preserved for the e11juyni:nt und use oj' future generations. Historic areas should be sensitively i11tc:ur11Le<.l with new developnents or maintained as separate historic areas as uµµ, ·uµ,· i u Le. !J. Mil:t:d use <1,:velopnents including residential, comnercial, or off ice uses should LJe pe,mit~'ed on a carefully regulated basis in the Macomb Road areu. 10. Crus~t: lie 'J'o\..n:ship should follow a policy of stringent code enforcement in ul I r-u:;iclt:1it iul uruas to ensure that pockets of blight do not begin to emerge as l1u111us uet 0lder·. 11. Uc:wl u[Jt.:r:s of' housing should be encouraged to construct housing \J1ich is <..:u111JJ(tti1.Jk in :size, quality of materials, and design with other existing or JJ/111111,:d l1uu:.i11!) in u st:ction of the toW1ship. - 1 - �1 I C0t,mcr~ i u I l.k:vcl 0µ111.:ut ,\l,1<.: 1,111.J Uuucl :sllou Id be deve I oped as a continuous conmerc i al district w1 i ch 111..:t.:L Liu.: full :;;lwµping and services requirements of the future Grosse Ile Tu111,::;l11p /><•fJ,dutio11. Existing residential buildings should be gr·adually phased 011 l. l. 11 1 ill ·• ·n,e :1,·ulif'e1·ution uf' small, scattered shopping facilities on Grosse Ile ::;/1vuld I,.; fJl'ul,iLi tecl. The master plan reconmends only 1\10 shopping districts: L/11.: lllui,1 .:Jiuµµi11y <.listrict on Macomb Road and a minor convenience shopping tl..:vi.:I u 1.. 1,..;1d u11 Lit<: southeast corner of Meridian and Horse Mi 11 Road. :J. J, ,i:v1"{,..Jti1Jl1.: 1w11 - c.;u11111er·cial uses should not be permitted on Alucomb aoad. •I. C,i111111Tt:1ul {udliLie:;; on Macomb Hood :should be designed so that llwy do not <.:u11j'I ict 1.•i!/1 t"u:;;idi;11tial or gover·m1ental develoJXnents on adjoining lund par-eels. 5. '1111.: <11.::;;1y11 quul i ty of' eonmercial buildings on Macomb Hood should IJe improved Ll11 ·u11y11 <.:/us<: couµerution of' the Plan Comnission and the business comnunity. (i. '1'111.: lv11n:;;ilip should seek to improve the aesthetics of the Macomb Road i11{1 •u::;1tw : lun: i,1cluJing installation of curbs and brick side¼(Jlks, installation uf Im.Jc1 ·: 11 ·u111,<.1 dl'ainage systems, and construction of entrance\.\Oy landscape l 1·cu 1111.:11 t :; . r. /\I I <:i:i:slirtg and proposed comnercial develoJXnents uf{-:;tr1.:d p11rld1,g facilities of pleasing design. li. should have adequate Si!Jflll!Jt: 011 AJucomb Road should be carefully regulated. !J. 1{ u de:;;iyn the:me is adopted for. storefronts on Maccxnb Ruud, it should be a tl1t.:1111.: 11/,id, c.levelops naturully from the character and purpose of the businesses i11 the ,u ..:<J; rwt a design concept \\hich is arbi trar·i ly sup<::rimposed on the af'ea u, · i.,;ll{vn:, :ll uua i 11:;; t the wi 11 of business pef'sons. lilc.lu:-;t,·iul Veveloµ1,er1L 1. J11uu:;;tr· ial .develoJXnent will occur only in the designated industrial pad-: and wi 11 i11dwle only light industrial developnent of high design qua Ii ty ,~llic.:11 clues ,wt c, ·uut..; cmy negative environmental effects. :!. l~uch [)l'Oposed industrial developnent project should be carefully evaluated Lo en..;1.11·i: that it is compatible with and complementary to other inclustriul i11::;tul lot i,,ns in tile industrial park. J. 'Jl1l: l(111nship \viii encourage industrial develop11ents \\hich attain the highest - 2 - �and best use of the industrial park; transitory, speculative, or poorly designed or constructed industrial investments will not be encouraged. 4. The to-....n.ship will encourage industrial develo(ment ¼hich utilizes the Grosse Ile Airport. The Airport facility will be continually improved, as funding permits, to more effectively serve industrial develo(ment on Grosse Ile. Special attention will be directed to the aesthetics of industrial deve l O(men ts to insure that industrial buildings and industrial site plans are visually pleasing, Kell landscaped, and do not detract from the quality image of the coornuni ty. 5. Conmmi ty Foci lit ies 1. Fire protection facilities should be located \.Jiere they can provide adequate service to all develo(ment areas in the to'Wlship. They should be of modern design and should meet the personnel needs of the department. 2. Police facilities should be located to allow deploynent of adequate manpower within minimum response time to all parts of the to-....n.ship. They should be of modern design and should meet the needs of the personnel of the department. 3. Tov.nship offices should provide adequate space for efficient conduct of tomship business and should be readily accessible to the public. Transportation 1. The design of the thoroughfare system should meet the requirements of both existing develo(ment as well as the proposed future land use pattern. 2. Thoroughfares should be organized in an interrelated functional system, and the traffic carrying and land use service functions of each thoroughfare segment should be clearly defined. Local streets should serve primarily abutting properties and should be used only by local traffic. Collector streets should gather and channel traffic from local streets to the major street system. Major streets should carry traffic to longer-range destinations on Grosse Ile and to the t\\-0 bridges to the mainland. 3. ¾herever possible, the location and design of thoroughfares should take advantage of scenic natural features. 4. Pedestrian and bi eye le l i nkage s should be provided be t-...,ieen deve l O(men ts \.Jierever possible. 5. Major thoroughfares should have a minimal number of intersect ions in order to limit friction. - 3 - �6. Develo{YT!ent of improved transit linkages bet~en Grosse Ile and the mainland should be encouraged. 7. Creative use of 'kUter access to Grosse Ile Toi111ship should be explored, particularly with respect to promoting tourism and recreational pursuits. Recreation 1. A balanced system of recreation facilities should be developed WJ.ich includes major conm.mity-wide day use recreation facilities, major park and athletic facilities for use by residents of the to\\llship, neighborhood recreation facilities, and special facilities such as conrnunity recreation centers, bicycle and hiking paths, nature study areas, and scenic riverside drives and vistas. 2. Open space areas should be linked WJ.erever possible in order to create functional relationships. 3. Private or corrmercially-operated recreation facilities should be related to the planning and develo{YT!ent of public open space areas '\\herever possible. 4. Environmentally sensitive areas should be incorporated into recreation facilities WJ.erever possible as an approach to their preservation. 5. Sites for recreation facilities should be acquired or reserved in advance of urban develo{XTlent pressures. Natural Environnent 1. Proposed new develo{XTlents should be revie~d carefully by the Plan Conrnission to ensure that natural features are preserved and integrated with the develo{XTlent design. 2. The Plan Corrmission should require that an environmental impact analysis be prepared for major develo{YT!ent proposals to ensure that such proposals are not detrimental to natural features of the to-w1ship. 3. If a proposed develo{YT!ent rmist destroy natural features, mitigation should be sought through \\hich the affected natural features can be replaced in another portion of Grosse Ile. 4. The to\\llship should vigorously enforce its existing tree ordinance. 5. Required Department of Natural Resources and U. S. Corps of Engineers permits should be obtained before the to\\llship issues building permits for any project '\\hich may affect the natural environment. Proposed develo{XTlents should - 4 - �also be reviewed by ™:lyne County Soil Erosion before permits are issued. 6. Developers should be encouraged to utilize more flexible cluster design options for developnents in order to protect natural features. 7. Natural drainage systems should be preserved in areas \\here new develoµnent is proposed. A master drainage plan should be prepared for Grosse Ile \\hich identifies natural drainage systems throughout the to-....nship. 8. The Plan Corrmission should seek to preserve a visual buffer of trees along street frontages \-\here new develo[YT!ents are proposed. This visual buffer of tree growth provides the M>oded atmosphere \-\hi ch makes a drive through Grosse I I e so scenic and tranquil. GI116 - 5 - �Population Analysis General Demographic Trends Al though Grosse Ile Township has experienced steady population growth over the past quarter of a decade, the growth has not exceeded reasonable limits, thereby allowing the Township to continue development in an orderly manner. The U.S. Census indicates that the population of Grosse Ile increased by about 1,500 people in each of the decades preceding the 1970 Census and 1980 Census (see Table 1). Estimates based on the number of housing units constructed during the past six years indicate that the population may have increased by approximately 500 people since the 1980 Census. It is evident that Grosse Ile is considered a desirable residential community, particularly because it is somewhat isolated from the downriver industries, and because of the unique features of the island environment. However, new housing construction and the subsequent growth in population has not been continuous from year-to-year, as might be expected in a desirable, upscale residential environment. It is clear that residential development and population growth on Grosse Ile have been affected by the economic cycles in the downriver area. For example, during the recession in the early 1980's, an average of only about eight housing units were constructed each year on Grosse Ile. During the past two years (1985 and 1986), however, the regional economy has gained strength, and an average of 65 housing units have been constructed each year. Thus, there appears to be latent demand for housing on Grosse Ile that is readily tapped given suitable economic conditions. Population growth has been closely associated with the level and cycles of new housing construction over the past two decades. Previous analyses have revealed additional construction and population growth on Grosse Ile. 1. factors that affect housing These include: Patterns of Develop■ent. Previous plans revealed that residential development on Grosse Ile occurred first along the east and west shoreline of the Detroit River and along interior canals. Apparently, developers were slow to recognize the value of the interior portions of the islands for residential use. Since most waterfront land has been developed, in recent years people have come to realize the interior land areas provide opportunities for desirable residential development. Geographic - 6 - �TABLE 1 TOTAL POPULATION Numerical Change Percent Change 1940 2,206 1950 3,956 +l,750 +79.3% 1960 6,318 +2,362 +59.7% 1970 7,799 +1,481 +23.4% 1980 9,320 +1,521 +19.5% 1984* 9,121 -199 -2. 1% Source: Bureau of the Census, U.S. Department of Commerce *1984 figure is an estimate. GIOll - 7 - �The pattern of development on Grosse Ile has apparently also been affected by the character of uses across the river. Development along the west side of the island has been retarded because of the impact from heavy industry along the waterfront in Trenton and other downriver communities. 2. Availability of Public Utilities. Development of portions of Grosse Ile may have been limited by the lack of certain public utilities, particularly sanitary sewers and storm drainage. Some interior portions of the island are susceptible to flooding and must be drained, adding to the cost of new residential development. Drainage of most subdivision lands has been successfully accomplished in the past with open drainage. In more recent years, problems have been encountered with the sanitary sewer system, resulting in flooding on the north end of the island. The capacity of the sanitary sewer treatment plant could limit future residential development in certain portions of Grosse Ile. 3. Accessibility. Accessibility has often been cited as a deterrent to growth on Grosse Ile. This issue is related in part to the inconvenience of only two points of entry to the community, via the two bridges. The concern about accessibility is related to a much broader issue, the proximity of the island to regional centers of activity. Residents must be content to travel off of the island for employment, shopping, and cultural opportunities, or to reach a major freeway. Such travel often is time-consuming and may involve long distances. Although the relative isolation of the island is often cited as an amenity, it may also be a factor which limits growth. 4. Public Policy. Public policy has also been cited as a factor that has limited the growth of Grosse Ile. Residents have recognized the fragility of their unique island environment. Consequently, policy documents and regulatory measures adopted by the Township have often sought to control the character and density of development on the island. It is evident that several factors have been and continue to influence the pace of residential development and population growth on Grosse Ile. Nevertheless, Grosse Ile is one of only a few downriver communities where growth is expected to continue during the next several years. Census statistics reveal that population growth has levelled off or actually begun to decline in most nearby downriver communities (see Figure 1). Among the six closest communities, Trenton, Wyandotte, and Southgate experienced actual decline in total population between 1970 and 1980. Riverview and Gibraltar recorded increases in population between 1970 and 1980, but recent estimates indicate that Riverview's population has levelled off at about 14,100 and Gibraltar's has levelled off at about 4,460. Among the six nearby communities, only Woodhaven has recorded substantial population growth in recent years. - 8 - �I ~ 2,000,000 , ,,-~, '" 8 ~ z ' ~ , ---- ,,,,,, ,..,,,. C i0 -,_ ,,,,,,,,,,, C ! ,,, 1,000,000 .,,- .,,,..,,- -- ~ . ,.,. oj " - " - " - • -• •, ,,, • / •·•···••••·•••••--••· •• ..- ······ ••• -- --- ---- 0 z -- -- ~ -------- • / • .,,,- . ~•• •• ••• -- • .,,,-· .,,,-· ·-·-·-· • ..... • Figure 1 1950 ~ ~ ~~ 0 < ffl Trenton ~ 20,000 Z ~ i ··········t······'"! - •••• -•··· ~~~ ✓--- - _.... --· Woodhaven GIIOSSE 11.E lOWNSIHP 10,000 // I, ••••·••• // ••••••••••••••••••• •••••••••••••• ·-GI blallar •••· ~o I 1940 0 Wyandotte Q ~• ... - ---- - ,.,. ~· 500 000 40,000 ►~ _ ~ / 1960 1970 1980 1984 estimate POPULATION TRENDS IN NEARBY COMMUNfflES Source: Bureau of the Census. U$. Deportment of Commerce Gerald Luedtke and Associates. Incorporated �Among other downriver communities located farther from Grosse Ile, Lincoln Park and Allen Park have experienced actual decline in population in recent years, according to Census figures. Taylor, Flat Rock, and Rockwood recorded growth between 1970 and 1980, but recent estimates indicate that the populations of these communities have levelled off in the 1980's. Population Characteristics A review of the age composition reveals that, as a whole, the Grosse Ile population is older than populations of most nearby downriver communities. The 1980 Census indicated that the median age of residents on the north half of the Township (Tract 5960) was 34.5 years, and the median age of residents on the south half (Tract 5961) was 33.6 years (see Map 1). In comparison, the median age of the population for the entire County was 29.3 years. In the six closest downriver communities, the median age ranged between 27.2 and 32.6 years. Median age statistics reveal that residents 55 years of age and older have been increasing in total number and as a percent of total population since 1960 (see Figure 2 and Table 2). In 1960, this age group accounted for 13.3 percent of the total population. By 1980, 17.5 percent of the population consisted of residents 55 years of age or older. In contrast, children under the age of ten have been decreasing in total number and as a percent of total population since 1960. Whereas this age group accounted for 22.9 percent of the total population in 1960, they constituted only 12.4 percent of the total population in 1980. Between 1970 and 1980 the number of children in the 10 to 14 age group also decreased. Residents in this age group accounted for 14.4 percent of the population in 1970, but they accounted for only 10.3 percent of the population in 1980. School enrollment data suggest that the number of children under the age of 15 has continued to decrease since 1980 (see Figure 3). In 1980, a total of 1,316 children were enrolled in Kindergarten through eighth grade. The number of children enrolled in these grades decreased each school year through 1985, reaching a low of 1,082 students. In the 1986-87 school year the number of students in Kindergarten through eighth grade increased slightly to 1,127 students. Al though the number of younger children under the age of 15 has been decreasing, U. S. Census data indicates the number of older teens has increased since 1960. Residents between the ages of 15 and 19 constituted 7.3 percent of the population in 1960; by 1980, this age group accounted for 11.1 percent of the population. - 10 - �•••... I ·••J I \ \ \ \ • I I I \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ I I I ! I I \ \ \ 5960 . \ \ \ \ I I I I I I I I I I I I I •• •• •• . GtOS.Mllit ,o,k-,ay Map1 GROSSE ILE CENSUS TRACTS �-----------------------------------------------------------------1■ 3,000 ~ - - - - - - - - - 2,500 ·•······•·····• ::::::::::::::: ::::::::::::::: ········•······ ··•············ ---------------------------------------------141 •!❖!•:•;•;•;•· 2,000 ::::::::::::::: ~lltili! i en Ill 0 Ill ~ •!•!❖:❖·•:• ~ ~=~=~=~=~;i~=~ 0 -------------------·:::::::~::::: • ~ l;l;l~l\\llt Ill 1,500 :::::::~:::::: z ·•···•········· ............,. .... ··•·•·•···•·••· ·•••··•····•••· ,-----~·:::::::::::::: ................ ··············· ··············· ··············· IIX-----"",!:!:!:!:!:!:!: 1,000 500 :=:::"10 tolf·years :::::.:,:-:-·:••··········•:❖ ::\ 20 to 34 years :-:::•:::•:::::~:~!!!!!❖:~: :♦··· ···············•:•···•:•: AGE OF RESIDENTS Figure 2 ~ :::, POPULATION AGE DISTRIBUTION 1960 1970 1980 Source: Bureau of the Census, U.S. Department of Commerce Gerold Luedtke and Associates, Incorporated �TABLE 2 POPULATION AGE DISTRIBUTION .,_ w Total 1970 Percent of Total Population Total 1980 Percent of Total Population 22.9% 1,317 16.9% 1,155 12.4% 1,172 18.6% 1,975 25.3% 1,994 21.47. 20 to 34 years 965 15.3% 1,016 13.0% 1,629 17.5% 35 to 54 years 1,891 29.9% 2,388 30.6% 2,915 31. 3i. 840 13.37. 1,103 14.1% 1,627 17.47. Total 1960 Percent of Total Population Under 10 years 1,450 10 to 19 years 55 and older Source: GI016 Bureau of the Census, U.S. Department of Commerce �2,700 2,600 2,500 I.. 2,.-00 z "' 3 2,200 ~ 2,300 w i "' !i 2,100 2,000 1,900 1,800 1,700 0 1967 1969 1971 1973 1975 1977 1979 1981 1983 1985 Fourth Friday of School Year Figure 3 Source: Grosse lie Township Schools SCHOOL ENROLLMENT Gerald Luedtke and Associates, IOCOf'pOt'ated �School enrollment figures verify the increase in the number of older teens, but the figures suggest that the size of this age group peaked in the mid-1970's. The number of students in ninth through twelfth grade increased from 818 in 1970 to 955 in 1975. Following the 1975-76 school year, the number of students in these grades decreased, reaching a low of 683 students in 1983. The number of students in ninth through twelfth grade rebounded to 718 in the 1986-87 school year. Since households containing older teens would also have adult members, growth in certain adult age groups would be expected. In fact, a substantial increase in the number of residents between the ages of 35 and 44 was recorded between 1970 and 1980. These age statistics reveal the following major trends: - Grosse Ile apparently appeals to mature families with older children. These families account for an increasingly larger segment of the population. - Newly established families with young children have become a predominant segment of the total population in the last several years. less - The number of residents in older age groups (55 years and older) is expected to increase, continuing a trend that dates back to 1960. There are several reasons for the changes in the age s true ture of the population. Natural aging of the population accounts in part for the increase in the median age of the population. Apparently, the in-migration of younger residents has not been sufficient to offset the movement of existing residents into the older age categories. In many communities, there is a tendency for older residents to move from the homes and communities in which they raised their families. This tendency provides opportunities for young families to move in, and overall aging of the population is not prevalent. However, experience has shown that in communities that offer special amenities that appeal to adults (for example, in waterfront communities), older residents tend not to move after their children have grown. The growth in the 55 and older age category indicates that many residents of Grosse Ile are not inclined to move after raising their families, and furthermore, many residents apparently consider Grosse Ile to be a desirable retirement community. The value of land on the island may also have an impact on the age structure of the population. The median value of owner-occupied housing reported in the 1980 Census was $91,400 on the north half of the island and $87,500 on the south half of the island. Much of the housing is not affordable for young families with children. Consequently, mature families headed by workers who are well-established in their professions are economically in the best position to purchase homes and move onto Grosse Ile. - 15 - �The age structure of the population may also be affected by the amenities offered on the island. The recreation survey completed in early 1987 revealed that most leisure time facilities and services are oriented toward adults. However, response to the survey indicated that facilities and services for families and young children are not well-developed. This orientation of public facilities and services, whether real or perceived, may deter prospective young families from moving onto Grosse Ile. Geographic Distribution Information concerning the geographic distribution of residents on Grosse Ile is lacking because the island is divided into only two census tracts. The 1980 Census revealed that 6,029 residents, almost 65 percent of the population, live north of Grosse Ile Parkway. 3,291 residents, about 35 percent of the population, live south of the Parkway. The Census statistics must be reviewed in relation to the existing land use map to obtain a true perspective of the geographic distribution of residents. Although only 35 percent of the population lives on the south end of the island, the south end contains much less acreage designated for residential land use. Thus, the density of residential development is not necessarily less on the south half of the island than on the north end. Based on review of the existing land use map and past studies, the following observations can be made concerning geographic patterns of residential development: - Early development occurred along the shoreline of the Detro! t River and along the canals. Waterfront access is probably the strongest focus that has influenced residential development in the past. - It appears that some of the oldest, highest density subdivisions were built on the east side of the island, indicating that convenience of access may have been an important consideration at one time. - Newer subdivision development does not appear to have occurred according to any discernable pattern of progression, a l though it appears that most of the newer, lower density subdivisions are located on the west side of the island. Concern for the quality of the environment may have influenced decisions to develop on the west side of the island. - Large tracts of undeveloped residential land are scattered across the island. The lack of development does not appear to have occurred according to any discernable pattern. - 16 - �In summary, it appears that access to the waterfront has historically been a key factor which has affected the geographic distribution of residents. The distribution of residents on interior portions of the island seems to have been affected by the decisions of individual property owners concerning the development potential of particular tracts of land, rather than according to any prescribed development pattern or pre-determined planning objectives. Future Population Growth The level of growth of Grosse Ile's population will be determined chiefly by four sets of variables: 1. Physical Li ■itations. Several physical variables will affect future population growth on Grosse Ile, including the amount of land that could be developed for residential use, the zoning restrictions placed on developable land, the capacity of the sanitary sewer system, and the amount of traffic that could reasonably gain access to the island via the two bridges. Considered together, these variables determine the "holding capacity" of the island. 2. External Variables. Certain external variables, such as the economic health of the downriver area, will have an impact on growth in Grosse Ile. 3. Characteristics of the Existing Population. Characteristics of the existing population, such as age structure and patterns of movement into and out of the community will affect population growth on Grosse Ile. 4. Preferences of Residents. Existing and prospective residents' preferences in terms of a living environment will have an impact on population growth. For example, the type and affordability of housing, characteristics of the environment, and availability of public facilities and services affect the residential desirability of a community. Each of these sets of variables are discussed in detail in the following paragraphs. Physical Li■itations. The land area on which housing units can be constructed is the key variable that determines the absolute maximum population of a community. A recent land use survey determined that 1,542.7 acres of vacant residential land remain on the main island and Hickory Island. About 148 acres of vacant wetlands must be subtracted from the total, since such lands are not likely to be developed. Consequently, about 1,349 acres of developable vacant residential land exists on Grosse Ile. - 17 - �Currently, there are 3,279 housing units which occupy 2,464 acres of residential land on Grosse Ile. Therefore, on the average, each housing unit occupies 32,736 square feet of land. If the remaining vacant acreage is developed at the same density as existing residential development, then another 1,795 units could be built on Grosse Ile. It is not likely that future development will occur at the same low density as in earlier times, when the large waterfront lots were created. Newer subdivisions have generally been designed in accordance with R-1-B zoning regulations, which call for 16,000 square foot lots. In order to determine the maximum number of units that could be built if the remaining vacant acreage was subdivided into 16,000 square foot -lots, it is first necessary to subtract the amount of land that would have to be dedicated for subdivision streets and public uses. Generally, about twenty percent of all residential land is used for such purposes. Consequently, about 1,079 acres would be left for residential subdivision. A total of 2,937 lots could be created if this remaining acreage was to be subdivided into 16,000 square foot lots. In summary, these calculations indicate that a total of 1,795 new housing units could be built at the existing average density of residential development, or 2,937 new units could be built if all remaining acreage was to be subdivided into 16,000 square foot lots. Based on an average of 3.15 persons per household from the 1980 U. S. Census, the maximum population of Gross Ile Township is calculated to be between 15,519 and 19,117. These estimates of holding capacity do not account for possible rezoning of R-1-B land to R-2 or R-3 to permit higher density development. Such rezoning would increase the holding capacity of the island. However, these estimates also do not take into account possible limitations on the holding capacity. These limitations include the capacity of the sanitary sewer system and wastewater treatment plant and the capacity of the two bridges. The deficiency of the sewer and wastewater treatment system may be a serious limiting factor affecting future residential development. Apparently, there is heavy infiltration into the system, causing severe difficulties at the treatment plant. Even though the plant was designed for a population of 22,600, it is doubtful it could handle any more wastewater under present conditions. Apparently, flooding is common on the north end of the island. Recently, the Township received a Notice of Noncompliance with state laws regulating wastewater treatment and discharge. Since additional development would exacerbate the sewer and wastewater treatment problems, this could be a factor that reduces the holding capacity of the island. - 18 - �The capacity of the two bridges is another factor that could reduce the holding capacity of the island. Wayne County Office of Public Services 24-hour, two-way traffic counts taken in September of 1985 reveal the following traffic volumes over the two bridges: Bridge Road Grosse Ile Parkway 5,246 vehicles 15,564 vehicles Assuming that about twelve percent of total daily traffic travels during the evening peak hour, then the two bridges nearly exceed the capacity of the bridges at peak hour at load level C. Load levels are used by traffic engineers to describe typical traffic conditions. Load level C is the desired level of service in urban settings, providing for stable operations with minimal backups and occasional loading at traffic signals. Substantial development of the vacant areas would probably lower the level of service on the two bridges, creating congestion, inconvenience, and a possible public safety problem. Consequently, the capacity of the two bridges is an important factor which may reduce the holding capacity of the island. External Variables. Certain variables are largely beyond the control of the Township and its individual residents, yet these variables have a tremendous impact on population growth within the Township. The general state of the economy and regional patterns of growth and development are {elated external variables that work in conjuction to affect population growth. Transitions in the economy have been cited as one of the key determinants of population change in Michigan, because of the effect of the economy on migration patterns. In general, a lackluster economy coupled with high interest rates results in a reduction in the number of families that purchase new homes or relocate. Thus, a poor economy tends to preserve the status quo or, in certain communities, results in reduction in population. The slackened demand for new housing in Grosse Ile Township in the early 198O's, and the general decline in population in many downriver communities, can be attributed largely to the general state of the economy. As the economy gains strength, regional patterns of growth determine the population growth of individual communities. Recent newspaper articles have noted that the downriver economy has rebounded since 1984, with $1. 7 billion invested in major industrial developments, construction of new industrial parks, and new initiatives to introduce high tech 2usiness, high-quality office/retail development, and upscale riverfront housing. 1 wang, Ching-Li and Rosen, Laurence S. "General Population Trends and Issues in Michigan." The Michigan Economy, Vol. 2, No. 6 (July-August 1983). 2 James Tobin, "Old Dreams Die; New Hopes Rise," The Detroit News, June 14, 1987, sec. 1, p. 1. - 19 - �As noted earlier, housing development on Grosse Ile rebounded in 1985 and 1986, consistent with the revival of the downriver economy. If the new economic development initiatives prove successful, it is likely that Grosse Ile will experience a corresponding increase in housing construction and population. The decade between the 1970 Census and 1980 Census provides a possible scenario; the cycles of growth and decline during this period resulted in the construction of an additional 793 housing units on the island. Population Characteristics. The earlier analysis of the age structure of the population revealed an increase in the number of households cons is ting of residents over the age of 55, plus an increase in the number of mature families consisting of parents who are at the end of their childbearing years and older teens. The number of younger families with children under the age of 15 has decreased over the past two decades. The next census will probably reveal an increase in the number of residents in all age categories over the age of 45, simply as a result of natural aging of the population. These population trends portend smaller household size and subsequent levelling off of the population. Southeast Michigan Council of Governments (SEMCOG) projections for the year 2005 call for an average household size of 2.55 persons in Grosse Ile, compared to an average size of 3.15 persons in 1980. If the SEMCOG projections prove accurate, the effect of household size alone on total population could range as high as 4,700 persons by the year 2005. Desired Characteristics of the Community. Variables related to people's preferences in terms of housing and the environment in which they live will affect population growth. History has shown that residents of Grosse Ile are acutely aware of and concerned about the pace of development and the type of new residential cons true tion in the community. Residents recognize that inappropriate residential development could affect the image of the island, alter or destroy natural resources, overburden public utilities, or contribute to overcrowding. As more people move onto the island, it will become increasingly difficult to protect the natural resources and other desired features of the community. As trees are cut and wetlands filled to allow continued development, the remaining undeveloped areas will be subject to greater use. The community's image as a low-density residential environment may be subject to change, especially if additional residential development results in traffic congestion, difficulty getting on or off the island, or other inconveniences. These issues are especially important in an island environment with finite boundaries, since the impact from continued development is not partially absorbed by surrounding communities, as is the case with a typical community. - 20 - �Eventually, a point will be reached where additional development will diminish the perceived desirability of the community, slowing the pace of residential development and subsequent population growth. The level of development at which this point is reached depends upon enforcement of ordinances to protect woodlands and wetlands, as well as policies, ordinances, and decisions affecting the location and density of future development. People's preferences in terms of type of housing will also affect future population growth. Single family detached housing is predominant on Grosse Ile at the present time. However, recent development proposals have revealed a demand for various types of attached housing. The demand for such housing could be expected to increase in future years as the population ages, since parents whose children have grown often don't want the responsibility of a large single family home. The construction of additional attached housing on Grosse Ile would increase the total number of housing uni ts that could be built on the island. However, households occupying attached housing typically are smaller than those occupying single family homes. For example, a recent survey revealed that the average single family home contains 3. 432 members, but the average townhouse con ta ins 3 only 2.385 members. The construction of new attached housing on Grosse Ile could affect the population in other ways. For example, housing opportunities for younger families could result if new attached housing appealed to "empty nester" households who subsequently move from their large single family homes. Such movement would result in the in-migration of younger, larger families, thereby producing an increase in population as well as a more balanced age structure. The ability of the Township to meet demands for public facilities and service could also affect the desirability of the community and subsequent population growth. The demand for amenities of urban living, such as plowed and paved streets and parks and playgrounds, often becomes apparent as the proportion of new residents (who are accustomed to such amen! ties) increases. The ability of the Township to meet these demands could affect the stability of the population, since residents who find their demands for public services unmet are more likely to move out of the community. 3 Robert W. Burchell, David Listokin, and William R. Practitioner's Guide to Fiscal Impact Analysis, New Jersey: - 21 - Dolphin, The New 1985, p. 64-.- - - �Population Projections Although evidence suggests that housing development on Grosse Ile is likely to occur at a modest pace given appropriate economic conditions, it is not likely that the Township will experience large scale population increase. The potential increase generated by new residential development will be offset by the decrease in household size described earlier. Furthermore, it is not likely that large scale housing development will occur on Grosse Ile. In spite of the successful economic development initiatives taken in recent years, statistics reveal that the overall direction of growth in the region is not toward the downriver area. While many communities in Oakland, Macomb, and Washtenaw Counties have gained population in recent years, 1984 Census estimates reveal that all except two downriver communities lost population since the 1980 Census. At best, it is hoped that recent economic developmeft initiatives will stabilize the population and economy of the downriver area. Grosse Ile would benefit most from such an impact, since the Township's population is more affluent and therefore more stable than the populations of most other downriver communities. The most precise population projections for Grosse Ile Township and other communities in the region have been prepared by SEMCOG as a part of its Version 84 Small Area Forecast. The small area forecast is based on local land use plans and policies, modified to account for sewer service, protection of environmentally sensitive lands, planned transportation improvements, and similar considerations. The SEMCOG projections indicate a 22.9 percent increase resulting in a total population of 11,451 for Grosse Ile Township by the year 2005 (see Table 3). This increase is projected even though the number of persons per household is expected to decline from 3 .15 to 2. 55. Thus, the net increase of 2,131 persons must be attributed to the projected increase of 1,516 households. Review of these projections reveals the importance of accurate estimates of household size. Current population and school enrollment statistics suggest that household size has and will continue to decrease. Nevertheless, if household size were to remain steady instead of decrease, this factor alone could make a difference of over 4,700 in population projections for the year 2005. The SEMCOG estimates are generally consistent with past housing construction and demographic patterns. Between 1970 and 1980, an average of 79.3 housing uni ts per year were cons true ted on Grosse Ile. The pace of cons true ti on has been much slower in the 1980's, with an average of 31.4 housing units being constructed each year. Thus, over the 17-year period beginning in 1970, an average of 59.6 housing units have been constructed each year on Grosse Ile. The SEMCOG estimates call for construction of 60.6 units per year over the next twenty years. 4 James Tobin, "Old dreams die; new hopes rise," The Detroit News, June 14, 1987, sec. 1, p. 1. - 22 - �TABLE 3 POPULATION AND HOUSFJIOLD PROJECTIONS 1980 2005 Percent Change Population 9,320 11,451 +22.86% Households 2,976 4,492 +50.94% Source: Southeast Michigan Council of Governments, Small Area Forecast, Version 84. TABLE 4 HOLDING CAPACITY OF TOWNSHIP Population Households 15 , 519 to 19 , 11 7 6,216 Estimates of holding capacity are based on subdivision of remaining vacant residential land into 16,000 square foot lots. Range in projected population is based on variation in household size. See text for complete explanation. GI017 - 23 - �These projections indicate that, unless established patterns of growth and development change dramatically, the population of Grosse Ile will not approach the holding capacity of the island during the twenty-year framework of this planning program. At minimum, it appears the population will increase by about 23 percent, with 11,451 persons. In the event that household size does not decrease to the anticipated level of 2. 55 persons, then the population could increase by a greater amount than projected. However, review of current population and school enrollment statistics reveals that household size has already decreased since the 1980 Census. Therefore, assuming that the projection of total number of households is accurate, it is projected that the population could reach a maximum of 13,800 by the year 2005. Implications of Population Change Projected changes in the population, particularly the age structure, will bring new demands for public and retail services. The population data indicated the number of younger families with children under the age of 15 has decreased over the past two decades. Decline in the number of students enrolled in Grosse Ile schools verifies this trend. Consequently, it appears unlikely there will be any sharp increases in the demand for service directed toward younger age groups. Educational leaders can concentrate on improving the range of quality of programs, rather that on accommodating increasing enrollments. The population data revealed that because of the cost of housing, the range of services, and other factors, Grosse Ile generally attracts more mature families, rather than young families. Traditionally, young families spend the most for goods and services, because of expenses related to setting up and running a household. It is likely that the commercial sector on Grosse Ile has adjusted to these household characteristics, as reflected the absence of a broad range of comparison retail businesses, such as furniture or home appliance stores. The establishment of new businesses of this type is not entirely ruled out, though, since projections indicate that several hundred new households will be established during the next twenty years, creating a stronger market. The population data also revealed that the number of households consisting of residents over the age of 45 has and will continue to increase. The public service and retail demands of this age group generally reflect their growing affluence and desire for improvements in lifestyle. Businesses that typically prosper as the population ages include travel services, the investment industry, gardening and lawn care suppliers, personal-care product manufacturers or retailers, and health care providers, and pharmacies. 5 5 Gary Blonston, "Advertising, marketing look toward older buyers," The Detroit Free Press, March 15, 1987, sec. B, p. 4. - 24 - �Some communities have experienced increased demand for public services as the population ages. The desire for improvements to the living environment often results in demands for better road maintenance, certain types of leisure services, a greater range of cultural fac111 ties and programs, and similar public services. Elderly residents often require special health care, nutrition and transportation services, On the other hand, as the population ages, many communities experience res !stance to increased public spending on education, parks and recreation, and other public services. - 25 - �Commercial Base Analysis Existing Commercial Facilities Analysis of the Macomb Street commercial corridor reveals that the community's commercial sector offers a limited range of goods and services. Even though the commercial sector is small, retail uses that provide necessities for living account for a small proportion of the businesses. Consequently, residents must travel off of the island for certain necessities or if they desire a broad selection of goods or a variety of stores, particularly if they are shopping for comparison goods. Also, certain specialized services, such as the services of a stockbroker or medical specialist, must be acquired off of the island. Numerically, service-type businesses are predominant in the Macomb Street commercial corridor, with a total of 27 such businesses. Service uses include beauty and barber shops, real estate offices, insurance offices, medical and other professional offices, and other businesses which provide a service rather than sell a product. Among the 19 retail businesses in the Macomb Street commercial corridor, those that market convenience goods are predominant. Convenience goods are those that are consumed or used on a daily basis, such as groceries, drugs, and hardware items. The Macomb Street corridor contains eight such businesses, including four establishments that market food items. Only a few of the retail businesses market comparison or "shopper· goods. Comparison goods are purchased less frequently and usually only after people have compared prices and quality of competing stores. Only four stores on Macomb Street are classified as comparison goods stores. The Macomb Street commercial corridor also contains five specialty retail businesses, including a gift shop, resale shop, video shop, and art gallery. Eight of the businesses in the Macomb Street commercial corridor are classified as general office uses. These include financial institutions, manufacturer's representatives, and other offices. The eleven remaining business uses on Macomb Street include res tau rants, meeting halls/clubs, and manufacturing concerns. Projection of eo-ercial Developaent Potential Projection of commercial development potential in Grosse Ile Township is a process involving the following steps: - 26 - �- Step 1: Delineate the potential trade area. Unlike a land-based community, the trade area of an island community does not include large portions of the surrounding communities. - Step 2: Determine local allocation of total sales. The purpose of this step is to determine what portion of the potential trade area actually is or could be served by Township businesses. - Step 3: Determine the trade area sales potential. - Step 4: Convert sales potential estimates into floor area requirements. - Step 5: Convert floor area estimates into land area requirements. Delineation of Trade Area. The first step in projecting the potential for future commercial development involves delineation of the potential trade area from which customers are most likely to be drawn to Grosse Ile businesses. Distance is normally the most important determinant of trade area, since most people will generally travel to the nearest businesses that serve their needs. Other factors that affect trade area include travel times, quality, service, variety of merchandise, accessibility, and socioeconomic differences between communities. The trade for convenience goods is generally limited to the residential areas immediately surrounding the business district. People generally will not travel great distances for groceries, drugs, and other convenience goods that they purchase frequently. In built-up areas, the trade area · for convenience goods may range up to 1-1/2 miles. In a low-density residential community, such as Grosse Ile Township, which contains only one centrally-located couercial district, the trade area for convenience goods encompasses the entire island. Comparison purchases are made infrequently, and usually involve co■parison on the basis of quality, service, price, and variety of selection. Hence, people will often travel great distances to make comparison goods purchases. In urban areas, the primary trade area radius for comparison goods is about 3 to 5 miles for apparel and household items when selection is not important, and 8 to 10 miles when selection and price are important. Thus, the potential trade area for comparison goods could encompass the entire island plus portions of surrounding communities. Based on the range of goods and services marketed by businesses in the Macomb Street commercial corridor, it is evident that residents make only a portion of their purchases in Grosse Ile Township. Residents of the trade area may take their business outside of the Township for a number of reasons, inlcuding convenience, accessibility, price, quality, or variety of selection. The "capture rate" indicates the portion of total trade area sales actually captured by Grosse Ile businesses. Local Allocation of Total Sales. - 27 - �The capture rate for convenience goods businesses is usually close to 100 percent in neighborhoods near the businesses, but the rate declines sharply at a driving distance of only 10 to 15 minutes from the businesses. In addition, it is likely that the capture rate for convenience businesses ls reduced because so many people travel off of the island to work or attend to other matters on a regular basis, whereupon they patronize off-island convenience businesses. Consequently, it ls estimated that 75 percent of the convenience goods market within the Township could be captured by Township businesses. It is unlikely that Grosse Ile businesses capture more than a fraction of the convenience market in adjoining communities. The few comparison goods variety to permit comparison likely that ninety percent or captured by shopping districts business in Grosse Ile do not provide enough on major purchase items. Consequently, it ls more of the comparison goods market is presently in surrounding communities. The share of the comparison goods market captured by Township businesses is not likely to increase substantially in the future. Generally, a minimum trade area population of 40,000 is needed to provide adequate mar~et support for a community shopping center containing comparison goods stores. The population projections presented in the previous chapter indicate that the island market will not grow sufficiently to support many new comparison goods businesses. Furthermore, the projections indicate that the off-island market is actually decreasing in size. In summary, the potential trade area for Grosse Ile businesses encompasses the entire island. Evidence indicates that Grosse Ile retail businesses capture only a portion of the total potential trade on the island. The capture rate is estimated to be about 75 percent for convenience goods businesses and about 10 percent for comparison goods businesses. Trade Area Sales Potential. Trade area sales potential is calculated using projections of change in the number of households, household income data, and data concerning household expenditure patterns. Retail sales are closely related to the number of households in a trade area. According to the U.S. Census, there were 2,976 households in Grosse Ile Township in 1980. According to SEMCOG projections, the number of households will increase to 4,492 by the year 2005. The population is expected to increase from 9,320 to 11,451 by the year 2005. \lhile number of households is useful for predicting retail sales, total population is useful in projecting need for certain services, such as doctors or dentists. 1 J. Ross McKeever and Nathaniel M. Griffin, Handbook, \lashington, D.C.: 1977, p. 4. - 28 - Shopping Center Development �It ls estimated that the total income of all households on Grosse Ile as of April 1987 was $169,414,640, or an average of $53,275 per household. This 2 estimate ls based on 1983 income estimates published by the U.S. Census. The 1983 estimates have been updated using the Consumer Price Index. By the year 2005, it is estimated that the total household income will increase to $239,311,500, an increase of about 41 percent. The 2005 es t imate is expressed in 1987 dollars, and is based on the increase in households estimated by SEMCOG. Data collected by the U. S. Census indicates that about 39 percent of all personal income is spent on retail goods, with about ten percent spent on 3 durable goods and about 29 percent on nondurable goods. Viewed from another perspective, it is estimated that about 14.5 percent of all personal income is spent on comparison goods, and about 25.4 percent is spent on convenience goods. Another 39 percent of personal income is spent on services, including medical care, auto repair, beauty and barber services, and other personal, professional, and repair services. Based on these income figures and the retail sales capture rates cited earlier, the current and future potential retail sales volume in Grosse Ile is estimated as follows: Potential Retail Sales Voluae 1987 2005 $34,730,001 $49,058,858 Ile tail Floor Area R.equireaenta. Re tail floor area requirements can be determined by dividing the sales volume estimates calculated above by the sales per square foot information for existing businesses. The Urban Land Institute provides information concerning sales per square foot in its annual publics tion Dollars and Cents of Shopping Centers. 2 East North Central: 1984 Population and 1983 Per Capita Income Es Una tes for Counties and Incorporated Places, Washington D.C.: U. S. Bureau of Census, Current Population Reports, 1986. Based on a 1983 personal consumption expend! tures report in the Survey ~ Current Business, published by the Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce. 3 - 29 - �Overall, the median sales volume per square foot of gross leasable sales area in neighborhood shopping centers in the Midwest ls $164. 93, according to 1986 figures published by the Urban Land Institute. In neighborhood shopping centers, the median sales volume per square foot of gross leasable area ranges from $60 to $85 for certain low sales volume businesses, such as variety stores, hardware stores, fabric shops, card and gift shops, and barber shops, to $140 to $170 per square foot for high sales volume tenants, such as ladies specialty stores, drug stores, radio, video, and stereo stores, jewelry stores, and liquor and wine stores. Supermarkets typically are the highest sales volume stores in neighborhood shopping centers, at close to $280 per square foot of gross leasable floor area. Based on these averages of sales per square foot, the total retail floor area needed to serve 75 percent of the convenience goods market and 10 percent of the comparison goods market on Grosse Ile is estimated as follows: 1987: 2005: 210,574 square feet 297,458 square feet Office floor space requirements for professionals who provide services directly to residents are based on the average number of office workers or office professionals who can serve a population of a given size. Finance, insurance, and real estate operations typically provide one office worker per 63 people, with an average of 160 square feet of office space per worker. Medical and dental standards call for one physician per 565 people and one dentist per 1,778 people with an average office size of 1,300 square feet. Legal off ice standards call for one attorney per 473 people with an average of 800 square feet of office space per attorney. Miscellaneous office services include engineers, architects, bookkeeping services, business education, and other office services. Typically, two square feet of miscellaneous office space are provided per person in the service area. These office space requirements do not take into account the needs of corporations or businesses where office workers do not provide a direct service to residents. Office needs related to operation of a corporation or business are included in the Industrial Base Analysis which follows in the next Chapter. Based on these office standards, office space needs in Grosse Ile Township are estimated as follows: - 30 - �1987 2005 Finance, insurance, and real estate 23,670 sq. ft. 29,082 sq. ft Medical, dental 28,258 34,719 Legal 15,763 19,367 Miscellaneous office services 18,460 22,902 86,331 sq. ft. 106,070 sq. ft. These estimates of office space needs are based on the assumption that on-island office operations will capture all of the demand generated for such services. However, it is likely that only a portion of the demand for off ice services will be captured by Township businesses. A 1968 economic study estimated a capture rate of 25 to 35 percent for medical offices, 30 percent for attorneys, and 60 percent for other types of office uses. Based on these capture rates, total office space needs for Grosse Ile are estimated as follows: 1987 2005: 37,861 square feet 46,517 square feet Land Area Requireaents for Retail and Office Developaent. A general standard for shopping centers is that the total site area should be about four times the gross building floor area. This floor area ratio provides ample room for parking, open space, pedestrian and traffic circulation, and landscaping. Existing lot coverage along Macomb Street varies, as indicated by the range in floor area ratio from less than 3 to 1 on the smaller sites, to ■ore than 8 to 1 on the more spacious sites. Generally, commercial sites on the west end of the corridor are more spacious, but older businesses located on the east end of the corridor have restricted sl te area. For the purposes of computing a conservative estimate of commercial land area needs, the 4 to 1 floor area ratios ls reasonable. Based on this ratio, the total land area needs for retail and office uses are estimated as follows: Retail 1987 2005 19.34 acres 27.31 acres Office 3.48 acres 4.27 acres - 31 - Total 22.82 acres 31.58 acres �Currently, land area occupied by commercial uses along Macomb Street 20. 67 acres. Additional commercial uses on the island (excluding a nursery) occupy 4.83 acres, bringing the total commercial acreage to 25.5 Thus, the calculated need for commercial land is nearly the same as the of land actually devoted to commercial uses at the present time. totals plant acres. amount As indicated in the earlier review of existing businesses, the commercial land area is not necessarily allocated to the uses that are most needed by residents. Consequently, the potential exists for additional commercial development to address unmet needs of residents. A comparison of the zoning and existing land use maps reveals that the land area zoned for commercial use exceeds the amount actually devoted to such uses. Currently, about 70 acres are zoned for commercial use along Macomb Street. Some excess of commercial-zoned land is needed to provide adequate area for development to meet future retail and office needs of the population. In summary, the commercial base analysis reveals that continued commercial development can be expected, particularly to address the unmet convenience shopping needs of present and future residents. The anlysis indicates that insufficient market support for most comparison goods businesses exists on the island. Consequently, it appears that the potential for large scale commercial development is limited. It is likely that any new construction of commercial facilities will be no larger than a neighborhood shoppi~ center, which has a typical gross leasable area of about 50,000 square feet. Such facilities can be accommodated within the existing Macomb Street commercial corridor, without need for designating additional land for commercial use. 4 J. Ross McKeever and Nathaniel H. Griffin, Handbook, Washington, D. C. : 1977, p. 4. GI039 - 32 - Shopping Center Development �Industrial Base Analysis Overview A longstanding objective of the Township has been to make efficient use of lands adjacent to or a part of the municipal airport that were formerly occupied or owned by the United States Naval Station. In pursuit of this objective, the Township created an Airport Commission and an Industrial Park Development Committee. Over the years, these two groups have initiated studies and formulated strategies to promote improvement of the airport and adj a cent lands. The benefits to the Township from the successful implementation of such strategies are numerous: on-island employment opportunities, increased tax base, efficient use of valuable underutilized land, more intensive use of the airport facilities, and improvement in the quality of airport service on the island. The future development of the airport itself for general avfftion purposes has been clearly set forth in a master plan completed in 1981. The airport master plan provided projections of future use, recommendations for new facilities, and a plan for airport and terminal layout. The conclusions and recommendations set forth in the airport master plan remain valid; accordingly, the Township and Airport Commission should continue to implement the plan. The following industrial base analysis focuses more specifically on the development and use of land adjacent to the airport proper that bas been designated for ind us trial use. In total, about 120 acres of land in the vicinity of the airport are presently zoned for industrial use. A portion of this land is located in the Grosse Ile Indus trial Park and is subject to covenants and restrictions which were adopted in December of 1984. The industrial park covenants reflect the desire for development that is consistent with residents' concerns for environmental quality and protection of neighboring residential developments. The covenants call for "complementary commercial, research and light industrial facilities." In light of the types of industries desired by residents, the term "business park" is probably more appropriate than "industrial park." Complete review of the convenants reveals that the preferred types of businesses include high-tech and research and development concerns, professional laboratories, and light manufacturing concerns. A regional perspective is required to determine the potential for growth of such businesses on Grosse Ile. Present day standards for industrial development are very selective, often calling for large amounts of land area, illIDediate 1 TransPlan Incorporated, Grosse Ile Municipal Airport Master Plan, October 1981. - 33 - �" access to highways and rail, availability of utilities, and other criteria. These rigorous standards limit the locations that could be considered appropriate for new industrial development. Consequently, new industrial development tends to be concentrated in just a few communities which serve the industrial needs of the entire region. Existing Industry A recent inventory of businesses in the vicinity of the airport revealed that current full-time employment totals about 270, and part-time employment ranges between 65 and 100, depending on the time of the year. The largest industry in the industrial park is Clark Brothers Metal Fabricators, Inc., which occupies 133,000 square feet of floor space and currently employs about 140 people. Clark Brothers is a supplier of metal products for the building industry. The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency is the second largest employer in the area, al though their facility is not located on Township ind us trial park property. Two EPA divisions are located at the Groh Road facility, the Eastern Response Unit, which deals with hazardous waste and other environmental emergencies, and the Large Lakes Research Station. Total employment at the two di vis ions is 55. Eagle Bobtail Tractor is second largest manufacturing concern in the airport industrial area. This industry employs about 20 full-time and about 30 part-time people in the manufacture of trailers. Two fixed base operators (FBO's), Jet Services and P. J. Aviation, are located at the airport itself. These businesses provide flight lessons, aircraft service and maintenance, air charter service, fueling, and other airport support services. According to a 1986 survey, the fixed base operators employ 17 full-time and 10 part-time employees. Most other businesses in the airport ind us trial area are small, employing less than ten full-time employees. Other businesses include the Grosse Ile Racquet Club; Circo, an industrial maintenance firm; Milt Stajich Custom Metal Work; Sydeline Corporation, a producer of fiberglass products; Wright Trucking; Roland & Company, furniture refinishing; Douglas West, chimney sweep and other maintenance work; Bare Window and Door, ins taller of new windows; and, Art's Print Shop. In addition to the industries in the airport industrial area, three small manufacturing concerns are located along the Macomb Street business corridor. The only other industry in the Township is located on the east side Stony Island, which is used as the base for a dredging operation. - 34 - �,, Industrial Developaent Trends Recent research reveals that, al though a few significant industrial development projects have occurred in the downriver area in recent years, industrial growth has lagged behind the rest of the metropolitan area. In particular, the downriver area has had difficulty in attracting high-tech and "smokeless" industries. As reported recentlJ, "the region's age-old industrial image continues to deter outside developers." According to various industrial development surveys, most recent industrial park development has occurred in suburban communities in Oakland, Macomb, and Washtenaw Counties. Some companies, particularly the high-tech firms, have been attracted to industrial parks in Oakland and Washtenaw Counties because of the proximity to research centers at colleges and universities. The image of the industrial park area and surrounding community is also an important feature for many new industrial park tenants, which may allocate 60 percent or more of their floor area for office use. Another important consideration for many new industrial park tenants is the quality of surrounding residential areas. Professional employees hold high standards for the neighborhoods in which they live and raise their families. In summary, the prevailing direction of industrial growth in southeast Michigan has primarily resulted in new development in the north and west suburbs. The rebound in the downriver economy has essentially saved current industrial employment, rather than expand the employment base. Furthermore, the downriver area's longstanding image as the center of heavy ind us try in the region has deterred efforts to attract "smokeless" industry. Grosse Ile Township• s efforts to promote ind us trial growth also have had limited success. The 1981 Airport Master Plan listed 27 tenants; recent review of the tenant list revealed that 18 of the businesses are no longer located at the airport or in the industrial park. The loss of tenants is due in part to the long-term strategy to upgrade airport and industrial park facilities to attract new commercial, research and light industries. For example, some businesses were displaced when several deteriorated structures constructed by the U. S. government in the 1930's and 1940 • s were removed. Grosse Ile has not yet experienced subsequent new growth to replace all of the businesses or jobs that were once located in the airport industrial area. 2 James Tobin, "Old Dreams Die; New Hopes Rise," The Detroit News, June 14, 1987, sec. A, p. 19. - 35 - �Industrial Township Develop■ent Potential in Grosse Ile The industrial development program in Grosse Ile has reached an important transition point. Certain key steps in the development strategy have nearly been completed, including removal of obsolete structures and upgrading of the airport facilities. Although renovations to the remaining buildings and landside airport facilities is still required, the airport industrial area has been readied so that it can now be aggressively marketed. Industrial developers cite five major considerations which determine the suitability of industrial sites: transportation, labor supply, energy and other utilities, availability of land, and public policy. Additional considerations that are relevant when selecting a specific site include topography and soil conditions, the direction and composition of population growth, the types of industries that are expanding or moving into the area, and the overall appearance of the industrial area. The following analysis reveals that, on the basis of these considerations, the Grosse Ile airport industrial area provides a unique setting that meets the needs of a select group of businesses. The analysis further reveals that the airport ind us trial area fills a special niche in the ind us trial market, and is not particularly well-suited for conventional industries found in many downriver industrial parks. Access to Transportation. The primary industrial location determinant is convenient access to freeway transportation. Over three-quarters of all land developed for industry is located within 2.5 miles of an interstate freeway interchange. A freeway location provides ind us tries with substantial transportation savings, an expanded labor market, and an expanded market area. The lack of quick, convenient access to 1-75 has been cited in the past as a deterrent to development of some types of businesses in the airport industrial area. Both the north and south routes to I-75 involve heavy traffic, extended delays at traffic signals, and travel on inadequately-maintained roads. In addition, vehicles may experience extended delays while waiting to cross onto or off of the island, particularly during the warm weather months when the two bridges open every half hour to allow boa ts to pass. A proposal to make major improvements to West Road, east from 1-75, is apparently now being studied by the state and county. Such improvements may improve access to Grosse Ile. The inadequacy of land-based transportation is offset by the most unique feature of the Gross Ile industrial park, adjacent airport access. According to the Industrial Development Handbook, proximity to airports is not a primary attraction for a majority of industrial tenants, but "airports c~ be expected to increase in importance as a factor in industrial locations." Currently, immediate access to an airport is considered a beneficial extravagance rather than a necessity for most industries. 3 Donald C. Lochmoeller, et al, Industrial Development Handbook, Washington, D. C. , 19 7 7: p. 84. - 36 - �According to the Indus trial Development Handbook, attracted to airport sites include: - Headquarters offices other facil ties. - National and companies. the types of industries for firms with widely dispersed locations for their international engineering and other professional service - Warehouse and distribution centers for parts and perishable goods, fragile or seasonal merchandise, or lightweight or high value merchandise. - Service industries related to air freight or air transportation. Other types of business that frequently locate near an airport include research laboratories, such as those that provide support services to the automotive industry; high-tech businesses, such as automotive design, communications, and computer development firms; aerial survey firms which would use the airport as a staging point for business flights; emergency care facilities which could provide emergency air transport to off-island medical facilities. Labor Supply. The availability of a trained labor force ls an important need that can be adequately addressed in the downriver area. According to the 1980 Census, Grosse Ile itself had a labor force of 6,873 people, with an unemployment rate of only five percent. Grosse Ile' s labor force is heavily weighted toward professional and technical occupations. Typically, such occupations make up a large part of the total employment of high-tech, research, and "smokeless" industries that are desired on Grosse Ile. According to the 1980 Census, almost 47 percent of employed Grosse Ile residents are employed in managerial and professional occupations, and almost 26 percent are employed in technical, sales, and administrative support occupations. The labor force of the downriver area is also an important asset for prospective industries in Grosse Ile. Michigan Employment Security Commission figures indicate that the downriver labor force totals 187,000 people, with an unemployment rate of 6.7 percent. As a whole, the downriver labor force cons is ts of a greater proportion of laborers, service employees, and repair workers, and a smaller proportion of professional and technical employees. According to the 1980 Census, about 18 percent of employed residents in surrounding downriver communities are employed in managerial and professional occupations, and about 30 percent are employed in technical, sales, and administrative support occupations. Over 20 percent are employed as operators, fabricators, and laborers, 17 percent as precision production, craft, and repair employees, and about 13 percent as service employees. In summary, the avallabil i ty of a trained labor force within the community and in surrounding communities is viewed as an asset with respect to industrial development in Grosse Ile. - 37 - �Energy and Utilities. Industry requires a reliable supply of energy and adequate utility services, including water supply and sanitary sewerage. The Township receives electrical service from Detroit Edison and gas service from Michigan Consolidated Gas Company. In the past, these energy services have been provided without serious or prolonged interruption. Adequate public water service is available throughout the island, including the airport industrial area. The airport ind us trial area is also served by the Township's sanitary sewer system. The deficiencies of the wastewater treatment plant should not affect new development in the airport industrial area, since lateral sewers already provide service to the area. Availability of Land. The need for large amounts of land, both for initial construction and for later expansion, has been one of the key reasons that industries have moved out of cities. A recent survey revealed that a maximum of only twenty percent of the total land area in newer industrial parks is typically occupied by the building itself. Newer industries prefer a site with ample room for landscaping, parking, loading, and stormwater management. Compared to many other communities, Grosse Ile has a limited amount of land area available for industrial development. As noted earlier, about 120 acres of land in the vicinity of the airport are presently zoned for industrial use on Grosse Ile. In comparison, some communities in southeast Michigan have allocated 10 to 20 times more land for industrial development. Grosse Ile's industrial area provides sufficient space for development of a select group of small and medium-sized firms. However, unlike other communities with more abundant industrial land, Grosse Ile's relatively small industrial area cannot accommodate a wide variety of different types of industry. Great care must be exercised to recruit a few quality industries that are compatible in terms of appearance, traffic, noise, scale of operations, and other impacts. Public Policies. Public policies affect the ability of business and ind us try to operate successfully. Public policies with the greatest impact on industry are reflected in adopted planning and zoning standards, procedures for review of development proposals, and actions taken to facilitate development. Officially, the Township has professed a desire to fully develop the airport Indus trial area in accordance with the ind us trial park covenants. Compared to some other communities in southeast Michigan, though, the Township's official policy has not been aggressively implemented. Overriding concern about the impact on the rest of the island from development of the airport industrial area has resulted in a hesitancy to act on certain proposals to improve and market the airport and industrial park. Progress to improve the facilities and appearance of the airport industrial area has been slow; landside improvements are still not complete, over 15 years after the improvement program was initiated. Furthermore, compared to the aggressive marketing efforts of many other communities, the Township's efforts to recruit industrial park tenants have been modest. - 38 - �,. Additional Considerations. The character of the surrounding environment is an important locational determinant, particularly for the types of industries desired in Grosse Ile. Well-educated, well-paid professional and technical employees are attracted to upscale residential cooununi ties with good school systems. The quality of the residential environment is an important asset that distinguishes Grosse Ile from most other downriver communities. Two additional considerations are important in determining the potential for ind us trial growth in Grosse Ile: the types of ind us tries expanding or ■oving into the area and the overall appearance of the airport industrial area. These two issues are related in that they deal with the image of the industrial area. The types of industries des ired in Grosse Ile -- high-tech, professional and technical, light manufacturing -- are conscious about their image. The physical appearance of an industrial facility can convey an image of success and quality. Since Grosse Ile's industrial area is largely vacant, the Township is in the unique position of being able to recruit the desired mix of tenants for its industrial park. However, it is evident that landside improvements described below must precede a successful industrial recruitment program. 1. Reconstruction of Groh Road. The main access to the airport industrial area, Groh Road, is in need of substantial rehabilitation. Three viable design alternatives have been identified for this project: - Alternative 1. Groh Road could be reconstructed as a divided road with a grass median , as it once was. This al terna ti ve would provide a park-like setting and maintain the greenbelt between the airport and ind us trial park. It would also maximize the traffic volume carrying capacity of the road. However, this alternative would not address the need for additional airport parking. The cost of this alternative is estimated to be about $1 million (1987 estimate). - Alternative 2. Groh Road could be reconstructed as a single, two-lane road, and the deteriorated south half of the road could be turned into a parking area. This alternative would cost about $800,000. Because this approach addresses both the parking and the access problems, this is the recommended alternative. - Alternative 3. Groh Road could be reconstructed as a single, two-lane road , and the deteriorated south half of the road could be removed and landscaped. This approach would not address the need for parking, but it would provide an attractive greenbelt between the airport and industrial park. This alternative would be the least costly of the three, about $760,000. 2. Airport/Industrial Park Interconnection. Improvements can be made to facilitate use of the airport by industrial park tenants. A freight/cargo staging area should be developed on the south side of Groh Road, with convenient circular access routes from the industrial park. - 39 - �3. Renovations to the Airport Physical Plant. The airport physical plant, most of which was constructed in the 1940's, is in poor condition and in need of substantial repair. These deteriorated structures do not convey the image of a dynamic hub of economic ac ti vi ty. The physical plant cons is ts of two open bay hangars, three sets of t-hangars, an airport maintenance building, electrical vault buildings, and other miscellaneous use buildings. Substantial rehabilitation of all of these structures is recommended. Recent estimates revealed that rehabilitation of the existing structures would cost about 30 percent less than total replacement. In addition to being cost-effective, renovation would maintain a physical link to the airport's fascinating history. Conclusions This analysis of industrial development has shown that, from a regional perspective, the downriver area has had to work extremely hard to maintain the strength of its industrial base. Recent economic development efforts have, in essence, saved current jobs rather than expand employment opportunities. Furthermore, the downriver area has experienced difficulty in making the desired transition from "smokestack" industry to "smokeless" industry. The Grosse Ile airport industrial area would fill a special niche in the downriver industrial market. Grosse Ile has a limited amount of land area that would be suitable for a select group of small and medium-sized industries that would benefit particularly from immediate access to air transportation and would appreciate the island's quality residential environment. Industries in Grosse Ile would also benefit from an adequate labor supply, adequate energy supplies and utilities and supportive public policies. The Grosse Ile airport industrial area has a few deficiencies which may deter certain industries from locating on the island. Most prominent is the lack of good land transportation, either by vehicle or by rail. The lack of abundant industrial land may also deter certain industries from locating on the island, particularly industries that anticipate future expansion or that require large amounts of land for storage or as a buffer from adjacent uses. Consequently, it is not expected that conventional industries found in most downriver industrial parks would be attracted to the Grosse Ile airport industrial area. This analysis has further revealed that future development of the Grosse Ile airport industrial area is based on the concept of mutual benefit: a prospective tenant must not only determine that the unique characteristics of the airport industrial area provide an appropriate setting in which it can prosper, but the tenant must also meet the development criteria established by the Township. It is clear that a select range of businesses would consider the Grosse Ile airport industrial area as an appropriate location for development. - 40 - �,. Since the range of appropriate prospective tenants is relatively small, it is important for the Township to implement a carefully formulated airport ind us trial park marketing strategy. The Township has already discovered the extra effort that is required to find and recruit prospective industrial park tenants that meet the specific development standards. It is also important for the Township to prepare the airport industrial park environment to meet the aesthetic and functional needs of the types of industry which the Township wishes to attract. These efforts will allow the Township to recruit the preferred types of industry and create a thriving industrial sector that is fully compatible with character of surrounding development. GI041 - 41 - �"' Natural Environment of Grosse lie Township Overview Grosse Ile Township's natural environment contributes greatly to the island's quality of life. Woodlands, wetlands, wildlife, natural drainage channels, small offshore islands (out islands) and Detroit River shoreline vistas are among the resources that make Grosse Ile a very special place to live. Once on the island, the open space and relatively low-density development promotes a feeling of privacy and rural living. The purpose of this chapter is to provide information to support the efforts of Grosse Ile Township's officials to protect and manage the island's natural resources. Wetlands, woodlands, and the unique natural features of Grosse Ile are emphasized. Sources of information used in preparing this chapter have included National Wetlands Inventory maps; Michigan Natural Features Inventory maps and information; interviews with scientists, township officials, and knowledgeable citizens; and reports about natural resources in the lower Detroit River area. The locations of key resource features are included on two maps in this chapter (see Maps 2 and 3). llm.ANDS AND THE DE'l'llOIT R.IVEB. ECOSYSTFJt Wetland Functions and Values Wetlands are commonly known as swamps, marshes, bogs, wet meadows, or potholes. From a technical standpoint, wetlands may be defined as areas of poorly drained, saturated soils supporting wetland vegetation. In wetland areas, either the water table is at or near the surface, or shallow water covers the site on a permanent or seasonal basis. 1980 wetlands information and maps compiled by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service for the National Wetlands Inventory demarcate the following major wetland acreage for Grosse Ile Township: Location Acres 138 Northern Grosse Ile Stony Island Thorofare Canal Eastern shoreline Celeron Island 69 26 17 92 - 42 - �I --. - - - I I I I T H I ii tlai I I ' I I i I Iii Ill \ i J I Hll I 3 3Z IH-111 I I ~ I I \ I \\ I I \ I I \... \ l 1 ~ ' \ \ \ - -- ~I ; I ·~ I I I J I • u I I• I I ) I I' Q ~ I ,/ 1-04 / I. i l I I jiIr -' if' I I l)J \ \ ' ' ' ! I I 1 I I I I I I \ '' ·,~ . ,.. .;,, ' ·,h ' · .... ., , ' , ,, , , , , , ,, , , , , , ai= u ' i I 1 '' I I • J' Ill !: ,,---f' ' I I N - , I 0J Ill J I I -- z i- I NI' 2Q I I Ill :E Ill G> IC 01~ J1i 't!"' Cl :ti • �"' High wlue 'Netland envirorments: Round Islam (Southern mesic forest) Gibraltar Bay emergent and sutmersed wetlands Out islands and nearby sutmersed wetlands Calf, Stony, Dynamite and Fox Islands) (including Celeron, Thorofare canal wetlands Shoreline \I.et lands Toll Bridge) (especially west side of Grosse Ile north of *Other high value wetlands providing wildlife habitat and sto~ter detention benefits must be identified on a site specific basis. ~ources of inforrootion: lletlands data: National ~tlands Inventory, prepared by the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service in cooperation with the Michigan Department of Natural Resources using 1980 aerial photography; wetland locations updated by to\41lship residents and officials, 1987. Presence of sutmersed aquatic beds confirmed by fisheries experts, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. Note to users: Cklly large wetlands wiich are 5 acres or more in size are sho\411 here. Smaller wetlands are fot.Url in nunerous Grosse Ile locations. Nearly all Grosse Ile Tomship wetlands are subject to wetland permit requirements of the Michigan Department of Natural Resources and the U.S. Anny Corps of Engineers. This info1Tl'l(ltion is generalized and should not be used for site specific planning. Specific locations of wetlands should be verified \Jten site plans are prepared. �,. The amount of emergent wetlands, of course, changes as the water level of the Detroit River rises and falls from year to year. Despite rising water levels, more than 300 acres of wetland acreage remain. Before human settlement of the Detroit River, many shoreline areas had abundant wetlands. Filling and dredging of wetlands continued at a rapid rate until the 1970's when federal and state wetlands protection laws were enacted. Three types of wetlands predominate within the boundaries of Grosse Ile Township: (1) emergent wetlands with rooted cattails, bulrushes, and sedge grasses; (2) forested wetlands with an overstory of trees and an understory of shrubs; and (3) submersed aquatic plants (macrophyte beds) with wild celery and other species. As water levels rise and fall from year to year, some ecological succession may be occurring as the wetlands shift from emergent marsh to forested wetlands or submersed aquatic beds. All types of wetlands are interrelated with each other, providing numerous benefits to the community as a whole. The functions and benefits from each type of wetland are outlined below. Scrub/shrub wetlands is a separate category of wetlands which has been mapped for the National Wetlands Inventory. Scrub/shrub wetlands are closely interconnected with emergent wetlands on Grosse Ile, and are considered as a single type of wetland for purposes of the master plan. F.mergent Wetlands Emergent wetlands are located along the shoreline of Grosse Ile, along the sheltered waterways of the Thorofare Canal and Frenchman's Creek, and on several small out islands within the boundaries of the Township. The largest emergent wetland areas are located north of Gibraltar Bay, west of Gibraltar Bay on Round Island, on Celeron Island, Stony Island, and the northwest shore of Grosse Ile near the toll bridge. Emergent wetlands on Grosse Ile are essential as habitat and as a food source for the abundant fishery of the Detroit River. As the wetland vegetation dies back each season, it breaks down into particles called detritus which is eaten by insects as well as birds and small mammals. Insects, in turn, are eaten by the fish. The shallow, sheltered wetlands connected with the Detroit River also · provide protected spawning and nursery areas for fish. For example, northern pike, yellow perch, and carp spawn in the standing vegetation of wetlands. Wetlands also help to enhance water quality. Wetlands trap soil particles from stormwater runoff. Since soil particles often carry with them oil, grease and heavy metals (toxic contaminants), a significant water quality benefit results when wetlands are protected. Further, many types of wetlands break down - 44 - �"' and absorb phosphorus, fertilizers). nitrogen, and other nutrients (such as from lawn Grosse Ile Township wetlands are habitat areas for the thousands of Canada geese, diving ducks and dabbling ducks which frequent the Detro! t River flyway during migration. Several flyways and corridors cross the Detroit River. Emergent wetlands play a role in buffering the shoreline from high winds and waves. Wetlands have been termed "nature's sponges" because they he l p absorb stormwater and storm surges. The wetlands grasses help stabilize the shoreline and minimize soil erosion. Forested Wetlands Forested wetlands (sometimes called floodplain forests) are dominated by swamp oak, red ash, eastern cottonwood, hackberry, silver maple, black willow, and red maple trees. In several cases, forested wetlands are located adjacent to emergent wetlands and open water; in other cases, they are located inland from the shore. The hydrologic connection of inland forested wetlands with the Detroit River ecosystem is not well-known. Inland forested wetlands may have been created by road construction and development blocking natural drainageways. Forested wetlands near emergent wetlands and open waters are clearly linked to the biological productivity and wildlife support functions of the Detroit River. Because of the trees, they provide a different type of shelter and habitat for various bird species. Inland forested wetlands also provide habitat for birds and small animals, and help to prevent local flooding by absorbing stormwater. Submersed Aquatic Beds (Macrophyte Beds) The submersed aquatic beds found near shorelines and in the sheltered bays of Grosse Ile Township support fish and waterfowl. The aquatic plant beds are accessible to fish and produce quantities of food for fish and invertebrates. Submersed aquatic plant bed species include wild celery (a favorite food of ducks), as well as pond weed, water weed, musk grass, water mil foil, and many others. Each bed is somewhat different, with varied mixtures of species of plants. The plants are rooted to the bottom of the Detroit River, often on a sand bar in shallow water. Invertebrates, including snails, live on their leaves. Fish enjoy the food and shelter provided by the aquatic plants, a fact well-known to area fishermen. The extensive submersed aquatic beds and shoreline wetlands help to maintain the fish spawning areas located near Grosse Ile in the Detroit River. - 45 - �"' Wetlands of Special Iaportance All of Grosse Ile Township's wetlands function as fish and wildlife areas, water quality filters, and storm surge barriers. Several wetland areas; however, due to their size and location, dominate as very important high value areas for conservation: - Gibraltar Bay, Round Island, and nearby wetlands: Gibraltar Bay is a natural area of great value to the Detroit River fishery. The Bay is sheltered but interconnected with the Detroit River. The Bay has variable depths and abundant submersed aquatic plants which provide food and shelter for spawning fish. Water flow from under the East River Road bridge transports relatively unpolluted water from the east side of the island westward into Gibraltar Bay. Field surveys by fish and wildlife biologists have emphasized the plant diversity and impressive primary productivity for nutrients. - Thorofare Canal: The shoreline wetlands and submersed aquatic beds which are found in various locations along the Thorofare Canal are very important as fish and wildlife habitat. The waters are more sheltered than the main channels of the Detroit River and have a good flowthrough of water. Shallow, protected backwater areas (sometimes with forested wetlands) are abundant along the main canal, providing spawning, nursery and feeding areas for fish. Ducks and other waterfowl also depend on the sheltered waterway with its abundant food sources. Shoreline wetlands near the toll Detroit River fishery because of levels of the Detroit River have into submersed aquatic beds, and inland. - bridge: This area is important to the its size and location. The high water turned some of these shoreline wetlands has extended the wetland system farther Celeron Island: Celeron Island, owned by the Michigan Department of Natural Resources, is now almost entirely a wetland island. The island has very high value for fish and wildlife habitat, and is used extensively by sportsmen. In addition, the sand bar area extending between Celeron Island and Calf Island, the submersed aquatic beds northeast of Celeron Island, and the waters south of Celeron Island serve as important waterfowl feeding and res ting areas. Stony Island: Approximately 50 percent of Stony Island is now wetlands and submersed aquatic beds, according to the Michigan National Wetland Inventory and 1985 aerial photographs. It is possible that some of the interior wetlands on Stony Island were originally created by quarrying. Rising water levels have created wetlands in recent years. The north part of Stony Island has been reported as a nesting area for egrets, white swans, and other waterfowl. - 46 - �,. At least eight different types of threatened or endangered species of plants and animals are found on or near Stony Island (see Hap 3). - Sugar Island: Sugar Island is an upland Island with very 11 ttle wetlands area. However, the sand bar off of Sugar Island supports wild celery, sago pondweed, and other submersed aquatic plants. These plants are a source of food for diving ducks. Threatened fish and animals found in the waters near Sugar Island and other small islands near Grosse Ile include the Lake Sturgeon (last seen in 1973) and the Comon Tern (last seen in 1982). Sugar Island is privately owned and used primarily for recreational fishing and hunting. Govern11ent Regulations for Wetlands Protection and Shoreline Protection Structures The legal responsibility for protecting wetlands on Grosse Ile Township lies primarily with the Michigan Department of Natural Resources and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. In accordance with federal regulations and state law, state and federal permits are required for filling, dredging, or other alteration of wetlands. A single wetlands perm! t appl !cation is sufficient for the two government agencies, since the agencies coordinate their technical reviews. The Michigan Vetland Protection Act (Act 203, P.A. 1979), requires a permit before wetlands alterations are undertaken. Permit requirements apply to all wetlands contiguous to lakes, streams and rivers; inland wetlands which are five acres or more in size; and isolated wetlands which have one or more acres of open water or lie within 1000 feet of the Great Lakes or 500 feet of a lake or stream. The Michigan Department of Natural Resources also administers federal requirements for Section 404 permits in accordance with an agreement with the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. Section 404 of the federal Clean Vater Act prohibits the discharge of dredged or fill material into waters of the United States, including adjacent wetlands, unless a permit is obtained. A second, closely related state law affecting wetlands and coastal waters is the Michigan Inland Lakes and Streams Act (Act 346, P.A. 1972). Under this Act, a permit is required for most activities affecting inland waters and the Detroit River. Permits are issued only when the activity "will not affect the public trust or riparian rights." For administrative purposes, the requirements of this law have been combined with the Wetland Protection Act and a single permit is issued. - 47 - �"' Wetland permits are issued by the Michigan Department of Natural Resources on a case-by-case basis. The particular wetlands resources of the site, the amount of upland available for building, and other site-specific factors are taken into consideration. Wetland permit restrictions supercede zoning and other township regulations if the township regulations are not as stringent. Permits for shoreline s true tu res some times overlap with wetlands permit requirements. Under Section 10 of the federal Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers prohibits the obstruction or alteration of navigable waters of the United States. Permits are typically needed for seawalls, shore protection structures, groins, and backfilling. Construction of marinas usually requires a permit under Section 404 of the Clean Water Act as well. It is important that potential owners of wetlands understand permit requirements and possible use restrictions. For example, a property owner may acquire land with wetlands on it, expecting to be able to fill and build on the wetland. Government permit regulations; however, usually serve to minimize the amount of wetlands altered, and requests for significant filling and dredging are usually rejected. Fermi t applications for piers, docks, bulkheads, sea walls, boat hoists, jetties, and similar types of structures may be granted. Permits are not issued, however, if proposed structures will obstruct navigable waterways or unnecessarily result in wetlands filling. A deteriorating seawall may be restored if the land is subject to either flooding or erosion. However, the placement of seawalls waterward of the shoreline and backfilling of water bottoms are usually not approved. Wetlands protection regulations, however, do not allow a "taking" of a person's property. If wetlands are found throughout a person's property, wetland alterations are granted so that reasonable property use is allowed. NATURAL DRAINAG.EWAYS AND SWALES The Iaportance of Natural Drainagevays Before urbanization occurred, Grosse Ile Township was laced with a series of creeks, natural drainageways, and lowlying swales (depressions) which carried stormwater and floodwaters into the Thorofare Canal and the Detroit River. As development has proceeded, many of the original natural drainageways and swales have been blocked or filled. A study of historic topographic maps indicates that at least 50 percent of the original drainageways on Grosse Ile are now lost. - 48 - �,. When natural drainageways are filled or blocked, drainage problems can occur. Sometimes stormwater runoff is pushed onto a neighbor's property or onto roadways. When buildings are placed in the pathway of the natural drainageway, basements can easily flood. As flooding problems become severe, storm drain pipes and roadside ditches may need to be cons true ted or enlarged. Such public works projects are often expensive, whether paid for by property owners or the township as a whole. Drainageways, when left in their natural state, help to maintain woodlands, wetlands and wildlife habitat found on the island. Without proper drainage, woodlands will change in character or die. Wetlands can be altered if the natural flow of waters is blocked. Maintaining Natural Drainageways and Swales Natural drainageways and swales should not be altered when developments are proposed, but rather integrated into site plans as natural amenities. When thoughtful site planning is carried out, natural drainageways can be assets for the site, contributing to the overall value of dwelling units constructed. Natural drainage pat terns, swales, wetlands, and woodland resources for development sites can be reviewed at the time that site plans are submitted for review and approval by the Planning Commission. The preparation of a Master Drainage Plan for Grosse Ile is also recommended. Such a plan would delineate the natural drainage system throughout the Township, identify locations where flooding may be a problem, and identify remedial measures. Individual site plans could then be reviewed within the context of water flows, stormwater runoff pathways, and natural drainageways for the entire island. WOODLAND RESOURCES Functions and Benefits of Voodlands Grosse Ile Township's trees and woodlands substantially contribute to the economic and psychological well-being of township residents. The abundant woodlands and trees help create the peaceful, rural atmosphere that makes Grosse Ile a very special place to live. Trees provide a visual barrier between individual properties and neighboring properties, an essential factor for preserving the rural atmosphere and property values. Woodlands provide the following community benefits: - 49 - �~ "'-, ~· / I -- - - - - --~ -·- - -~-- ---~, -~ -~ , . IIIENION --. --· '· / W'(NIOC)ll( -' ' 0f'IIQr ·, ' '. 21.A -- I ---~--- 4--- ~ -"' ~ x.. .. ... . \ I - ... --l.._ -- ,.......,\'°"" ...,,__ •19 ~ I !!Q~ A18 --- ~-:•-~ 1, · -------------------------':'.:~:------ . ~6 ' ~ 1 2 u;9 .~ 1/ -c----• -~ ~ - - - ...----C::::::::::-· ·~ ----- -~ --~ ♦11,.' :,.!~ ,-f""!!#1 1 1 1 • A13, •o,_.- "-\•: le ...., :v , · - •5 ---- ..-l!lil',---- -~ -------- ----- 111\1111 ~ ~ Climax Hardwood Forest (self-reproducing) A Threatened or Endangered Species ♦ Special Concern or Potential Threatened Species • Map3 SIGNIFICANT WOODLANDS AND NATURAL FEATURES Township of Grosse lie Wayne~ Michigan ---"1al'l-1987 Champion Tree , .. . . . . . . tfNr'II: S..rc•• •f i,.f.,.,.t __,,..,. dela : ••= Ill I ,,-11 \fupp,1"1:I 1,,. llrm ·r. J,w1••• I llttlll llf " \ (1,-fof ._.,,.,. #1dti"9' NICurwl ........ ,... f,n,atl.,,,: hn.,1•"•P r•11111f•,H , h1 ~•"' ,.,, 1w •.. . \11d1111u,1 H•11u,,,,·,••1 . -~- l»p,u•f,,.,111 11/ I ~Hli f ,,.,,u,· ,\ohwul lhc ill.Hu 1w ••••Hrtl 11,,, .., • • ,,.,,.,,·ul, : rd ,._,, ,.,tf' • lp,t'n (tt• , -~ l , 11 ul 10 0 .- VI' l 'f"IIVU l'n· /t.'ulun.! it •'111t1l 1f ,~ , ... ,. ,(Htd kllt.'11 •1 , .. plu1,,. u•·•· ,.,.,.,,.,,.,,., . l ~' I , 111 : 1·11 i. 1ttt1I 11h1N1I , •., .•,. . ,,,.~ ,. li• ·out, ,.,, . 111 ,,..- /un,,t .. l j/11;11,,,,, ... 11 111/Ultl•tflUII •h•H1ltl ftir 1•1• /'1 •/ 1••" 1-, f 1N ·111 ·• ··.. ·._ u/ 1unfH I,,.,, 1,ifu,..,.,r,0•1 l\11t•11 , •..,..,, •• ,t, . ,,., ... fh1 • /m, U !'lllf/1 , • fUl "l • t<J f/11' /oi l ,(' p/u,I i-t •\ •1t•h• /N '1H'C H,- , Gelaldt.uedll9andAaoc:laW,lnc:apo«Jted Urban Plamlng Conulanll Denoll.Mlc:hlgan �,. GROSSE IL! TOVNSHIP SITES: NICHIGAM NA11JRAL FF.A.TUR.ES INVENTOlt 1 - STROPHOSTYLES HELVULA Trailing Wild Bean Special Concern Plant Year Last Seen: 1916 2 - CHAMPION TREE - Swamp White Oak 3 - A THllEATENED ANlltAL Potential Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1912 4 - CHAMPION TI.U - Honeylocust 5 - ACIPENSER FULVESCENS Lake Sturgeon 6 - CYCLONAIAS TUBERCULATA Purple Wartyback 7 - CASMERODIOS ALBUS Great Egret 8 Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1978 Special Concern Animal Year Last Seen: 1933 Special Concern Animal Year Last Seen: 1978 - OBOVARIA SUBROTUNDA Round Hickorynut Endangered Animal Year Last Seen: Before 1930 DYSNOHIA TRIQOETRA Snuffbox Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: Before 1930 9 - 10 - LAMPSILIS FASCIOLA Wavy-Rayed Lamp-Mussel Special Concern Animal Year Last Seen: 1908 11 - A THR..EATENID ANIMAL Potential Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1970 12 - DYSNOHIA TORULOSA RANGIANA Northern Rifleshell Endangered Animal Year Last Seen: Before 1930 13 - ICTIOBUS CYPRINELius Bigmouth Buffalo Special Concern Animal Year Last Seen: 1964 14 - THALICTRUII IEVOLOTUM Waxy Meadow-Rue Threatened Plant Year Last Seen: 1970 15 - GYKNOCLADOS DIOICUS Kentucky Coffee-Tree Special Concern Plant Year Last Seen: 1912 16 - HIBISCUS fl>SCHEUTOS Rose-Mallow or Marsh Hallow Special Concern Plant Year Last Seen: 1914 17 - MESIC SOUIBERH FOREST Special Plant Community Year Last Seen: 1983 18 - STERNA HllO'NDO Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1982 Common Tern Lake Sturgeon Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1970 20 - PER.CINA COPELAND! Channel Darter Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1952 21 - ACIPENSER FULVESCENS Lake Sturgeon 22 - CHAMPION Tl.EE - Downy Hawthorne Threatened Animal Year Last Seen: 1970 19 - ACIPENSER PULVESCENS 23 - GROSSE ILE GARDEN CLUB WILDLIFE SANC11JARY Source: Michigan Department of Natural Resources, September 1986. �"' Influence on ■ icro-cliaate: Woodlands play an important role in moderating ground-level temperatures. The tree canopy buffers the ground surface from the sun's heat and wind. Trees also help to moderate temperature extremes during winter months. Reduction in air pollution: Woodlands absorb carbon dioxide and return oxygen to the air. Tree leaves filter pollutants from the air, removing ozone, chlorine, hydrogen fluoride, sulfur dioxide, and other pollutants. Trees serve as a noise buff er as well. Reduction in soil erosion: Woodlands and other vegetation stabilize soils and help prevent soil erosion. The vegetation absorbs the energy of falling rain, and the web of roots of all types help hold soil particles in place. Tree leaves reduce the impact of raindrops on the soil surface and give soil a chance to absorb water. Fallen leaves minimize the loss of soil moisture, help prevent erosion, and enrich the soil to support later plant growth. Wooded wetlands provide the additional benefit of trapping and holding stormwater runoff. Dense vegetation can help slow flood surges and flows. Wildlife habitat: Woodlands provide essential shelter and food for raccoon, rabbi ts, pheasants, and other birds and animals. The opportunity to observe wildlife in a natural setting has educational benefits for island residents. WOODLANDS OF SPECIAL SIGNIFICANCE Cliaax Hardwood Forests Grosse Ile Township woodlands can be classified into two categories: (1) climax forest hardwoods which can reproduce themselves, and {2) early second growth vegetation, including hawthorn thickets. Climax hardwood forests are dominated by white oak, shagbark hickory, sugar maple, and green ash. Major climax hardwood forest areas have been identified by township resident Brue Jones with advice and assistance from several forestry experts. Because many woodlands have already been destroyed, the proper management of the remaining stands is of great importance for the island. Heritage and Chaapion Trees A heritage tree is a tree with high value becau·s e of its species, size, age, vigor, location, or historical significance. Although a number of large heritage trees are present on Grosse Ile, the location of these important trees, for the most part, has not been mapped. The locations of two known champion trees are shown on Hap 3. - 51 - �,. Round Island and Vicinity The most unique and important woodland site on Grosse Ile is Round Island, a forested wetland. The forest on Round Island is old growth, making it much more unique than many other woodlands on the Island. Red oak, burr oak, and white oak are the dominant species. The mature mesic (wet) oak forest is one of five uncut stands remaining in Michigan. The site is believed to be the last old growth oak forest remaining on the Lake Erie plain and the big trees are the largest in any tract in Monroe and Wayne Counties south of Dearborn. Because of the trees' great height, they may act as a beneficial buffer from storm winds off Lake Erie (June 1983 letter from K. Hosford, Michigan Department of Natural Resources). This tract probably represents the last example the Lake Erie Plain as described by French explorers. natural area is comparable to that of Hartwick Pines. provided by the Site Ecological Summary prepared Department of Natural Resources, June 1983). of presettlement forest on Its value as an "historic" (Additional information is by K. Chapman, Michigan Round Island is approximately 13 acres in size. Because of its small size and location, it is vulnerable to the effects of high winds and storms. Protection of the entire tract and adjacent woodlands to the west will be essential in the future for protecting the 7-8 acre oak forest located in the heart of Round Island. Round Island is owned by the Ford Yacht Club which has held the tract for many years without proposing development or alterations. The Yacht Club has placed Round Island on the Natural Features Registry of the Michigan Nature Conservancy. This is a voluntary registry without any agreements or legal obligations. Wildlife Sanctuary The Grosse Ile Township Garden Club is responsible for the management of the woodlands tract located just to the northeast of Horsemill and Thorofare Roads. The site is owned by Grosse Ile Township. Because of its location near the Thorofare Canal, the sanctuary is particularly important as wildlife habitat. Michigan Natural Features Inventory The Michigan Natural Features Inventory is maintained by the Michigan Department of Natural Resources as a service to citizens and local officials. Plants and animals which are (or are potentially) threatened or endangered are listed on the inventories. To avoid curiosity seekers, only the general locations of the features is mapped. The inventory is not a definitive statement about the presence, absence or condition of environmental features, since many of - 52 - �" the sites listed have not been completely surveyed. Unfortunately, some features present in the past, many have already been destroyed by human factors and development. Endangered or threatened plant and animal species from Grosse Ile Township lands and waters are noted on the natural resource features map (see Map 3). If developments are proposed on or near these areas, the presence and importance of the plant or animal should be reviewed. For extremely rare or endangered species, a permit may be needed from the Michigan Department of Natural Resources. Threatened and endangered species may have special value when located in a protected area or woodland. It may be the presence of woodlands which has protected the species and provided habitat. Woodlands and Development Impacts Woodlands are easily destroyed by development. Large trees of unique value may not be accurately identified by landowners and buildings may be planned on prime woodland sites. Developers, in their haste to clear land, may overlook woodlands protection plans. In some cases, trees which are saved die within several years because of root damage and changes in water table conditions caused by land alteration. Excavation soils (especially clays), when placed near trees, can inhibit proper root respiration. The regulation and protection of woodlands is even more difficult than wetlands. Scientific definitions of wetlands have been established for many years. In contrast, it is often difficult to identify "unique" woodlands, since most trees provide the basic screening and amenity values of importance to the community. Effective woodlands protection becomes much more a matter of effective site planning and incentives to developers. Priority woodlands for protection on Grosse Ile include climax hardwood fores ts and forested wetlands. Whenever possible, stands of trees should be protected through the use of cluster development site layouts. Special attention should also be placed on street frontage and other visual buffers. GillO - 53 - �,. land Use EXISTING LAND USE During July of 1987, Gerald Luedtke and Associates, Incorporated completed a survey of existing land use in Grosse Ile Township. Land utilized for single-family housing development comprises the largest land use category in Grosse Ile. This use currently occupies over 2,463 acres of land. The second largest land use category is vacant land which comprises 1,660 acres. Public and semi-public facilities including the airport, churches, schools, and protected natural areas such as Celeron Island comprise 686 acres. Grosse Ile Township has 520 acres of land utilized for recreation. Multiple-family housing utilizes 124 acres. There are 44 acres of commerc !ally-developed land and 3 acres of land utilized for office development. Grosse Ile Township has 64 acres of submerged land. The tabulations resulting from the land use survey are shown in Table S. Examination of this table will show that Grosse Ile Township is 70 percent developed. Discussion of Existing Land Use by Sector This section of the master plan discusses existing land use relationships in seven sectors of the township. The sec tor of Grosse Ile Township be tween Groh Road and the southerly township limits contains several diverse land uses; the major land use is the Grosse Ile Municipal Airport which contains 610 acres. Other uses in this section of Grosse Ile located sou th of Groh Road include several very pleasant residential communities which are located on Swan Island, Hickory Island, Heso Island, and Elba Island. Calf Island, Round Island, Sugar Island and Fox Island are essentially undeveloped islands. This section of Grosse Ile also includes several recreation facilities including the Ford Yacht Club, two marinas, and a small passive park which serves a surrounding residential community. The former dump site, which ls located in this area, has also been designated for future recreation use. An important land use planning issue is the need to ensure that future expansion and development of the Grosse Ile municipal airport and adjoining industrial park do not conflict with the residential environment which surrounds the airport area. This area of Grosse Ile contains several sensitive natural areas which should be carefully preserved in future planning. Round Island contains forested wetlands and woodlands which should be preserved. Gibraltar Bay contains important celery beds which are essential to wildlife. Significant celery beds are also located in the submerged land area east of Elba Island. These natural areas are discussed in more detail in the natural features section of the master plan. - 54 - �,. I I I I 01'0 H I I I I ii I I \ '' \' ' \ \\ '' \' ' \' \ ' \ I ! 1. , ~ , -J! �,. The area of Grosse Ile Township between Grosse Ile Parkway and Groh Road contains a wide diversity of land uses ranging from the large industrial park on the south to the Grosse Ile Golf and Country Club and West River Yacht and Country Club on the northern portion of this area. This area also contains the Island Memorial Park Cemetery. The area also has several large tracts of undeveloped land which could be utilized for residential development. One large tract of land is located between Meridian and East River Road. Another large vacant tract is located west of Meridian. Although this section of the township has large parcels for potential new residential development, there are certain future land use relationships which must be carefully monitored as development occurs. The industrial park and airport to the south could be environmentally detrimental to future residential development if appropriate buffers and transitions are not provided. The two existing golf and country club facilities provide a very pleasant image to the area and increase the desirability for future potential residential development. The section of Grosse Ile Township located between Ferry and Grosse Ile Parkway contains the main Macomb Road shopping district as well as the campus of Grosse Ile High School. Slightly more than half of the land in this sector of the township is vacant. This prime land is very suitable for future single-family and multiple-family residential development. The two large vacant tracts on either side of Macomb Street, east of Meridian, contain important woodlands which should be carefully considered in future development planning. Thorofare Canal, which penetrates this sec tor of the township diagonally, has many significant adjacent wetlands which should be carefully preserved in planning for future development. Because of the proximity of vacant areas to the main shopping center and the high school, this sector of the township would be most suitable for development of housing for senior citizens. The section of Grosse Ile Township between Church and Ferry is largely developed with the exception of three undeveloped areas. These areas include the eastern portion of the Westcroft Gardens property and two linear str.ips located between the Thorofare Canal and East River Road. This section of Grosse Ile contains several newer residential subdivisions with curvilinear street patterns. Some of the finest residential neighborhoods in the community are located in this area. This area also contains the West Shore Country Club. The Sacred Heart Elementary School is located in this sector between East River Road and Parke Lane. The sector of the township between Horse Mill and Church is primarily developed for single-family residential use. There are two distinct areas within this sector. The single-family residential development area west of the Thorofare Canal consists of older subdivisions with a rectilinear street pattern. The newer single-family residential development area east of Thorofare Canal consists of curvilinear streets containing many fine new homes which have been constructed during the last few years. This area contains several smaller - 56 - �[ "' undeveloped parcels which can be developed in the future to round out the existing single-family residential character of the area. The area of the township between Bridge and Horse Mill is about half developed with single-family housing and half undeveloped. The undeveloped portion of this section contains the wildlife bird sanctuary. The area also contains one multiply-family development, The Country Manor development. Because of the proximity of this area to the toll bridge, it should become very desirable as a future residential development area. In order to protect the environmental features of the area, very careful and sensitive design of future subdivisions will be needed. The section of Grosse Ile from Bridge Road to the north end is emerging as a very high quality residential community. Particularly, along such streets as Parke Lane, Paulina, and Voight. Care should be taken so that the remaining vacant developable portion of this sector continues to develop at the same high level of residential quality. The last sec tor of Grosse Ile cons is ts of Hennepin Island. This island is utilized by the BASF Wyandotte Corporation for disposal of industrial wastes. This area will continue to be used by the company for industrial purposes and should not be made available for any other type of development until needed environmental studies have been completed, and it can be determined that it is safe for other land uses. Stony Island which is located on the east side of the main island is primarily vacant, but contains an industrial zone on the extreme easterly portion of the island which is utilized for barge storage. All of Stony Island contains important wetlands and woodlands which are discussed in the natural features section of the master plan. Sugar Island is an undeveloped island which contains significant woodlands which should be preserved. Round Island is also vacant, and contains significant woodlands and wetlands. Celeron Island contains extremely important woodlands and wetlands; this island is owned by the Michigan Department of Natural Resources and will be permanently preserved in its natural state. Areas of Historic Significance Grosse Ile Township has several areas and structures which are of historic significance. These areas have been surveyed with the assistance of the Grosse Ile Historic Commission and are shown on the map following this page. This map represents a preliminary portrayal of survey results; the data on the map will be further refined as the Historic Commission proceeds further with its work. The areas shown on the map should be carefully taken into consideration by the Plan Commission when future planning decisions are made. GI097 - 57 - �,' I -...-..._ -~. lllf~ -- - - - - -~-- - . , I ·~-· --~,, '· ANIIIWW "'✓ L::> WVNCX>III -I \ \ on.ow, ~- \ \ - \1 \ --- --- --~-- - -~ ' c,,__ '"'re •-- ::::::;;::,~~~~~;:.,~=!~~;z,.=-=:::---,,-=--==----- --==~=;;;;a, <_, --c:: ·- · - --- "-- - -- - - - • • ---------- .... ,'!!'1- --- --- u;;;_ _..___ - --- ~ I. 2. J. 4. 5. b. 7. 8. 9. 10. II . Map5 12. AR~ OF HISTORIC SIGNIFICANCE Township of Grosse lie Wayne County, Michigan Mcnlef"'°"-1917 I). I~. 15 . ' l~ ...~ . . . 11\ . . . . ,, . . ~ ,.. . ---------- I - IIMA - - - - ~ - - - -iiiiico c o- - - - - - Hickory l1l1nd Pre 1945 Hoae ■ In the Ar•• of Croh Road and Weit River Road lnter ■ ectlon Weit River Road Hl ■ torlc Hoae ■ Dl ■ trlct Slocu•'• l1l1nd Overlook Be I I vue Road M ■ co•b Road Hletorlc 8ualn••• Ol ■ trlct East River Road Oletrlct fox School Jewell Colony Westcroft Cardena Older Su-er Ho•e• Parke Lane : Pre 1945 Ho••• (Vernor f ■ •lly ho•• located on northeast corner of Horse Mill and E■■ t River Road lnter ■ ectlon.) Upper East River Road Church Historic District Area on East River Road fro• ferry Road to the North GelOld Luedtke and A51oci0tin, I n c ~ IJlban Planning COfllUltanll Oeffolt, Mld'ligan �,. F1JTUn: LAND USE PLAN The future land use plan for Grosse Ile Township (see Map 6) recommends a land use pattern which closely follows the historic development pattern of the community. Most vacant land areas are recommended for single-family residential development. The industrial park area remains the same. The previously mixed land use pattern of the Macomb Road shopping area has been designated as a continuous commercial development area. A very limited number of multiple-family housing locations have been shown in the plan. The major areas recommended for new development in the plan are described in the following sections: Single Family Development There are ten large undeveloped land areas which have been designated in the plan for single-family residential development. They are as follows: 1) The undeveloped area bounded by Meridian, Manchester, East River Road and Rucker; 2) the undeveloped area within and surrounding Loma Circle; 3) the larger undeveloped area bounded by Meridian, Bellvue, East River Road and Manchester; 4) the undeveloped area bisected by Thorofare Canal which is surrounded by West River Road, Ferry Road, Meridian and Grosse Ile Parkway; 5) the area bounded by Thorofare Canal, Island Drive, East River Road, and Ferry; 6) the undeveloped linear strip which is bounded by Thorofare Canal and East River Road located north of Stout; 7) the Westcroft Gardens property; 8) the vacant property abutting Park Lane between Horse Mill and Church. (Development of this area will complete an emerging residential community); 9) the large vacant area both north apd south of Horse Hill Road; and 10) the triangular undeveloped area bounded by Meridian, Park Lane, and Paulina. All of the smaller islands surrounding the main island of Grosse Ile have been designated for single-family development with the exception of Hennepin Point and a small portion of Stony Island where industrial processes are located. Nev Multiple-Paaily Residential Developaent Areas Areas designated in the future land use plan for multiple-family residential development are very limited. They consist of the following: 1) A small strip of multiple-family housing along Groh Road across from the Municipal Airport; 2) a small multiple-family residential area north of Groh Road and directly north of Frenchman's Creek; 3) multiple-family development areas are recommended both north and south of the Macomb Road commercial district. (This will help to strengthen and reinforce the main commercial core of the community); 4) a multiple-family residential area is recommended off of Horse Mill Road between West River Road and Meridian. - 59 - �,, ·; ; 'i i ~ t-+----;--- lf I r1f·: I •·! ~ I I i j I ~ , / / , ·~~ / I ! • ..> , r i r_,.... I I, I :_-: •. • I , ,._ . .. I \ 11,1 en ::, I • I C ~ , , 11,1 ~ 5 I ~ u. -J! )1 .~ 0~ ·- §i 0. i:: I Jii I I �--- ·---=--- TABLE 5 EXISTING AND FUTURE LAND USE FUTURE LAND USE EXISTING LAND USE Single-Family Residential Multiple-Family Residential I .... C\ 2,463 Acres 124 Acres Single-Family Residential Multiple-Family Residential Commercial and Office 3,838 Acres 284 Acres 97 Acres Commercial and Office 47 Acres Public and Semi-Public 686 Acres Public and Semi-Public 244 Acres Recreation and Open Space 520 Acres Airport 459 Acres Industrial 305 Acres Recreation and Open Space 520 Acres Industrial 138 Acres Special Environmental Zone (Hennepin Island) 225 Acres Vacant Land Submerged Land 1,660 Acres 64 Acres Submerged Land TOTAL ACREAGE GI125 5,869 ACRES TOTAL ACREAGE 64 Acres 5,869 ACRES �. Commercial Developaent The main commercial area recommended in the future land use plan exists on Macomb Road from Meridian to the existing multiple-family apartments located directly west of East River Road. This will provide the main shopping, professional services, governmental and institutional core required to serve the Grosse Ile community. There is a small area recommended for convenience shopping in the plan at the southeast intersection of Meridian and Horse Mill Roads. Westcroft Gardens and an existing inn on the northeast intersection of Meridian and Groh have also been shown as commercial uses on the plan. Industrial Develop■ent Industrial development on Grosse Ile is limited to the single location of the Grosse Ile Indus trial Park on Groh Road opposite the Municipal Airport. Previously existing industrial processes on Hennepin Island and on Stony Island have been designated as special environmental zones and are not industrial development areas. These areas have been designated so that such uses will be limited and so that no new uses can be constructed until proper environmental studies and clearances have been approved. Because Grosse Ile Township has prepared a new zoning ordinance concurrent with this new master plan, the township's zoning pattern will accurately reflect the land use recommendations which are set forth in the master plan. - 62 - �II' THE MACOMB ROAD BUSINESS DISTRICT The Macomb Road Business District is a special land use area in Grosse Ile Township. This is the center of shopping, personal services, government, and education in the community. For many years, Macomb Road has served as both the major shopping street on Grosse Ile as well as a residential street. Many older homes are interspersed with businesses along Macomb Road. This intermixture of commercial and residential uses has become increasingly unsatisfactory. The traffic and activity generated by commercial uses is detrimental to those residences which are interspersed with the commercial enterprises. Many of the older homes have deteriorated and are now in poor condition. The Commercial Base Analysis chapter of the master plan indicates that as Grosse Ile continues to urbanize, there will be a stronger demand for commercial facilities. The master plan recommends that the entire extent of Macomb Road be zoned for commercial development. The only exceptions would be where multiple family residential development already exists. By zoning Macomb Road frontage for commercial development, a gradual process of replacement of existing residential structures by new businesses should take place. The existing land use pattern along Macomb Road is portrayed in Hap 7. Analysis of this land use survey map indicates that there are three under-utilized sections of Macomb Road frontage which could be developed for commercial use in future years. The first under-utilized section is located on the north side of Macomb Road and extends from the existing Nate's Market to Parke Lane. This section of Macomb Road frontage contains seven existing residential structures, one residential structure which has been converted to commercial use, and four structures which were originally built for commercial occupancy. The second potential area for future commercial development is also located on the north side of Macomb Road and extends from the Parke Lane condominium development to the existing Cabinetworks Shop. This area contains twelve residential buildings, six residential buildings which were converted to business use and six structures which were built for commercial occupancy. A third under-utilized area which could developed for more intensive commercial use is located on the south side of Macomb Road and extends between Parke Lane and Perdino's Restaurant. This area contains five residential buildings and no converted residential or commercial buildings. Rezoning of these three under-utilized sections of Macomb frontage for commercial development should spur new retail, office and other uses to develop in these areas. Before these under-utilized areas of Macomb Road become commercially developed, the township should establish higher standards for planning and design of commercial developments. These areas, if properly designed, will set the stage for the overall rejuvenation and improvement of the entire length of Macomb Road. It is far easier to require good design of a commercial business prior to construction, than it is to try to correct poor design in already existing commercial enterprises. - 63 - �,. -~)L Meridian Map7 MACOMB ROAD EXISTING LAND USE 1::/::::{:::::::::j Single-Family Residential !88888888881 Multiple-Family Residential - Commercial and Office 1I 1111111 II Public and Semi-Public Vacant land 1 inch = 600 feet �Special Macomb Road Urban Design Issues The rezoning of Macomb Road frontage for commercial development presents a strong potential for consolidating and strengthening the main shopping district of the Grosse Ile community. However, there are certain design problems and opportunities which should be addressed prior to future development on Macomb Road. Urban design problems include parallel parking, unpaved parking lots, poorly defined parking areas which merge with the right of way, head-in parking, numerous potholes and puddles, poor landscaping in both parking areas and in the fronts of businesses, and lack of a uniform sidewalk treatment along Macomb Road. Identity of the Main Shopping District We recommend that stone entranceway structures be constructed at both ends of Macomb Road to visually announce the beginning of the main shopping district. Since the linear shopping district is strung along a long linear strip, these entranceway treatments will give identity to the main shopping area of Grosse Ile. Such structures could be in the form of a low natural stone wall on both sides of the road with light fix tu res and signs denoting entry to the business district. Ideally, these stone structures should be built of a type of stone which is indigenous to Grosse Ile. The !Aage of the Roadway Macomb Road has a chaotic "ragtag" image because it lacks curbing and the gravel along the right-of-way weaves in and out of ditches and driveways, and there are abundant potholes and puddles along both sides of the right-of-way. We recommend that underground drainage be installed where ditches now exist. Permanent curbing should be installed on both sides of Macomb Road and, wherever possible, turning lanes into businesses should be established on the edge of the existing pavement. This will substantially improve the appearance of Macomb Road and will give a neat edge to the entire roadway. Parallel parking and head-in parking along the right of way of Macomb Road should be eliminated wherever possible and should be prohibited in future commercial developments. The township should encourage development of parking areas behind businesses wherever possible. The front of businesses should be utilized for landscaping and pedestrian access. The existing parking lots should be paved and should be landscaped as generously as possible. Many existing off-street parking lots have no landscaping and consist of mud, gravel, and potholes filled with water. The Need for Uniform Sidewalk Policy Some portions of Macomb Road are served by sidewalk and others are not. Most of the sidewalks are unattractive, some are poorly maintained, and generally - 65 - �,. they add no interest or character to the shopping district. We recommend that the township adopt a uniform sidewalk policy along Macomb Road. All future commercial developments should be required to provide sidewalks. We recommend that all sidewalks along Macomb Road be constructed of red brick pavers. The red brick will give a much needed element of interest and warmth to the Macomb Road streetscape. \lherever possible, existing businesses should be encouraged to provide brick sidewalks. Ultimately, the entire commercial frontage of Macomb Road should have a continuous red brick pedestrian sidewalk on both sides of the street. An Architectural Tbeae for Maco■b Road There has long been considerable discussion in the Grosse Ile community on establishing an arc hi tee tural theme or treatment along Macomb Road commercial frontage. Some community residents favor a nautical theme because Grosse Ile is an island community and the water plays such an important role in the leisure-time activities of residents. Other residents have suggested that Macomb Road have a rustic image with cedar shake tile roofs and old fashioned wooden signs which identify the various stores. An examination of the existing architectural character of Macomb Road shows a wide divergence of building styles--in fact, some of the commercial buildings have no discernable style at all. Beginning at East River Road, one sees tudor style commercial buildings, California contemporary-style buildings, simple plate glass store fronts, converted victorian style residential structures, fake mansard roofs, and standard contemporary shopping center-style commercial buildings. This mixture of arch! tectural treatments and styles does not comprise a visual image which has any overall coherence or theme. The nautical theme could be introduced in special entranceway structures at either end of Macomb Road and also in the use of bollards on nautical posts with linking ropes to separate parking areas from the main right-of-way of the street. In some cities which have initiated a nautical theme, it has resulted in an unfortunate use of counterfeit design elements such as sticking ship wheels across the facade of a commercial building or trying to turn the front of a restaurant into a ship's hull. These design concepts tend to cheapen the image of the commercial district rather than to improve it. The most successful nautical design themes found in ocean-front communities along the Atlantic Ocean are actually reproductions of the original fishing village architecture. The proportions of the buildings, the wood and roofing treatments recreate the early oceanside villages. However, such design treatments are not really indigenous to Grosse Ile. It would appear that the most suitable solution to improving the aesthetic image of Macomb Road would be to perm! t a variety of architectural designs, but to encourage developers of commercial properties to informally consult with the Grosse Ile Business Association and Plan Commission on the compatibility of proposed designs with the overall streetscape image. Diversity of architectural style in a shopping district can be quite stimulating and pleasing so long as each building, in itself, represents good design. - 66 - �,. Other Land Uses Related to Kaco■b Road Commercial Frontage As Macomb Road continues to develop for commercial uses, it is recommended that apartment developments be clustered around the Macomb Road business district and that future needed community facilities such as police or fire stations or expanded educational complexes be located as close as possible to the Macomb Road District. This will establish a strong commercial/institutional/governmental nerve center along Macomb Road and these uses will reinforce and complement one another. For example, a trip to a future library could also include a secondary trip for shopping. Or a person may wish to visit certain stores before visiting the police station or the township hall. All of these functions can more efficiently serve the public if they are grouped in a common setting. GllOl - 67 - �Transportation The primary road network on Grosse Ile has been described with the phrase "the circle and the cross." The cross consists of Grosse Ile Parkway and Meridian Road; the circle along the perimeter consists of chiefly East and West River Roads. The circle and the cross roads intersect with a number of east-west collector roads to form the primary road network on the island. Local roads and subdivision streets complete the road network, providing direct access to abutting land and to the collector roads. Road Classification Classification of roads is necessary as a means of communicating the purpose served by each street or road in the transportation system. Road classifications identify the type and volume of traffic that is appropriate for each segment of the road network. The classifications establish expectations among residents, Township officials, and transportation engineers concerning the operational characteristics of each road. Wayne County has jurisdiction over public roads on Grosse Ile. The County has set forth a simple administrative classification, denoting roads that are County primary or local roads. The following Grosse Ile roads have been classified as County primary roads: Bridge Road, from the toll bridge to Parke Lane East River Road, from Horse Mill Road south to Hickory Island Bridge Grob Road, from Meridian Road east to East River Road Grosse Ile Parkway, from the County bridge to East River Road Grosse Ile Parlcvay raap to West River Road Horse "ill Road, from West River Road east to Meridian Road Horse Mill Road, from Parke Lane east to East River Road Meridian Road, from Bridge Road south to Groh Road Parke Lane, from Bridge Road South to Horse Mill Road West River Road, from Horse Mill Road south to Groh Road County primary roads receive priority treatment in terms of maintenance and snow plowing. In addition to being classified as County primary roads, a portion of Meridian Road south of Grosse Ile Parkway, and the portion of Grosse Ile Parkway west of Meridian Roads are classified so as to be eligible for federal aid. - 68 - • �The County's classification system is useful for identifying government responsibility for each road, but is not necessarily the best system for transportation planning purposes. A functional classification sys tern would be more useful as a planning tool. The following three-tier classification system more adequately describes the functional characteristics of Grosse Ile roads: Arterial roads serve the major centers of activity, the highest traffic volume corridors, and the longest trips. Arterial roads on Grosse Ile include Grosse Ile Parkway, Meridian Road, Macomb Street, portions of East and West River Roads, and a portion of Bridge Road. Collector roads penetrate neighborhoods, distributing trips from the arterials to the local roads or to the ultimate destination. Collector roads also collect traffic from the neighborhoods and channel it to the arterial system. Collector roads on Grosse Ile include Horse Mill Road, Church Road, Ferry Road, a portion of Bellevue, portions of East and West River Roads, Groh Road, Parke Lane, Thorofare, South Pointe, and a portion of Bridge Road. Local roads primarily provide direct access to abutting land and to Movement of through traffic is usually collector and arterial roads. deliberately discouraged on local roads. Subdivision streets are a type of local road. Traffic Voluaes and Patterns Map 8 indicates the volume of traffic on Grosse Ile roads. This map is based on 24-hour, two-way traffic counts taken by the Wayne County Office of Public Services (previously the Wayne County Road Commission) in 1985 and 1986. As would be expected, the traffic counts reveal a basic orientation toward the two bridges. The Grosse Ile Parkway bridge is the primary access to and from the island; the 24-hour, two-way traffic count across this bridge was 15,564 vehicles. In comparison, the traffic count across the toll bridge at the north end of the island was 5,246 vehicles. The following reasons have been offered to explain why Grosse Ile Parkway is the favored route to and from the island: - Many residents may decline to use the toll bridge because of the cost. This reason is plausible, since the average single-family home records about five trips in and out on a typical day. If only three of these trips are off of the island, the annual cost of using the toll bridge would be over $1,600. - 69 - �rllfHION ............... , - - - - - - ~- - - OIII._. "" ·, c#,_, ' ·- ·- •- ..;·- ·- ·- ·- MIMEW , , I \ / - ... .i:::::::::,~. .c::> , I ... '' .. f-:) •.•,. --\\ ~v........_ • ~ ' -----~ ', ~J --~-- ---=-~ C : : : ----.;,..._~ -~ I ·J· - ~ ~it °"'°" I --- • c,,-- ~ ~llfl>r4 - - -----:::---.,, c._... ·--- -..... -====-·--=---====~=~ ._ , ]I L1:!L 'I ' ~--- ...,. , •.m 1 J IT1 . . .____," ,_ = -·- \ ~ ~► l . ~ • • t~: 11J· );! ~ :r!. Ir1 il~::i-:-~ ta ~ , I ..... ,... I t '----~ L -~ ; 1( · - in•• · .----·----------------------- .... =-- -~------7~ . -::._,;¢-- - , ~ - 24 HOUR TWO-WAY TRAFFIC COUNIS Map8 TRAFFIC VOLUMES 'Wayne County, Michigan MClllefPlan-1917 '-ire ...._... -·~------ ~ -••• Township of Grosse lie Wl'ANOOlll ! Ql. : ' . . ..._ --------~ - - ---- L=:: - f ~:, . /J ··- ~"'"t--,,,____~ ,.. ffi w-- Mofe Than 10,000 Vehicles S,000 to 10,000 Vehicles 3,000 to 4,999 Vehicles 2,000 to 2,999 Vehicles 1,000 to 1,999 Vehicles Current Traffic Counts Not Available GelOld wedllle and AaocicdN, lnc:OlpOIOted Urbon '1aMlng CoNullanll o.t!Oit. MIC:hiQan �It is more convenient for most residents on the island to use Grosse Ile Parkway than the toll bridge. Collector roads that intersect Grosse Ile Parkway appear to be well-maintained. Traffic flows smoothly across the Grosse Ile Parkway bridge, whereas traffic is delayed at the toll booth on the toll bridge. Finally, for most residents the travel distance to the Grosse Ile Parkway bridge appears to be less than the travel distance to the toll bridge. - Once off of the is land, the Grosse Ile Parkway route may of fer more convenient access to regional transportation corridors and other destinations. Although the distance between Grosse Ile and I-75 is roughly the same from either bridge, many drivers consider the southerly route to West Road to be faster and more convenient than Sibley Road. Further analysis of the traffic counts reveals that most traffic which uses Grosse Ile Parkway is distributed via Meridian Road, and to a lesser extent, East River Road. An even smaller amount of traffic is distributed to or from Grosse Ile Parkway by way of West River Road. Traffic counts along Meridian Road, East River Road, and West River Road in the vicinity of Grosse Ile Parkway are as follows: Meridian Road: East River Road: West River Road: 5,800 to 8,300 vehicles 2,400 to 3,600 vehicles 1,600 to 2,800 vehicles Traffic that uses the toll bridge for access appears to use Meridian Road as the primary means of access to or from Bridge Road. Consequently, traffic levels are fairly uniform along Meridian Road. Traffic counts exceed 4,000 vehicles along Meridian Road, from Bridge Road to Bellevue, then drop to about 3,600 vehicles south of Bellevue. As noted above, traffic along Meridian is heavier in the vicinity of Grosse Ile Parkway and Macomb Street. In summary, the traffic counts reveal that the most heavily travelled roads are Grosse Ile Parkway, Meridian Road, Bridge Road, and Macomb Street. Lesser amounts of traffic are carried by the arterial and collector roads that intersect with these primary access routes. Grosse Ile Parkway south of Meridian is the only road where the traffic volume approaches the design capacity. According to the Highway Capacity Manual (Highway Research Board, 1965), a typical two-lane paved road should be able to carry up to 1,400 vehicles during the peak hour of traffic, and a total of about 18,000 vehicles per day. The capacity of roads on Grosse Ile may be somewhat less than these standards, because of the number of curves, intersections, and frequent driveways that intersect the collector and arterial roads. Nevertheless, the traffic counts reveal that almost all roads on Grosse Ile carry far less traffic than indicated by their design capacity. For the purposes of comparison, nearby roads off of the island carry the following traffic volumes in a typical 24-hour period: - 71 - �No. of Vehicles Sibley Road between Allen and Grange 13,326 between Grange and Fort 14,048 between Fort and Quarry 9,232 between Quarry and Jefferson 7,631 Van Horn Road between Allen and Fort 13, 122 between Fort and Jefferson 10,854 Jefferson Avenue between Toll Bridge Road and Sibley 7,511 between Sibley and King 7,406 between King and West 8,327 between West and Van Horn 10,758 Based upon analysis of existing traffic volumes and projected population growth, a recommended future thoroughfare classification system has been set forth in Map 9. Transportation Issues Several issues or problems concerning transportation have emerged based on analysis of the data presented herein. These issues are discussed in the text which follows. 1. Road Iaproveaents. lowing transportation needs: Residents of Grosse Ile have identified the fol- - many residents would like to have gravel roads paved, and - many residents want improvements made to certain paved roads. The Township presently has a policy of paving roads only where a special assessment district has been set up to finance the improvements. Within the last three years, the County has relaxed its standards to allow asphalt paving without curbs; previously, newly paved roads had to meet subdivision standards. It is clear that paving improves the quality of travel on Township roads; in many cases, paving also improves the appearance of subdivision and local roads. In light of these benefits, the Township may want to take a more aggressive position and encourage residents to petition for special assessment districts for paving of their streets. The Township could continue its policy of paving only where a special assessment district has been set up, or it could also seek other sources of funding for a more comprehensive paving program. --- - - - - - - - - -- --- - 72 - - �r "I I ,~ I 01'0 1! I I I I ii I 1 \ I \ \ I \\ I I \ I \ I l \ I I \ •• I �r "I With regard to improving the design and condition of existing paved roads, a key constraint is the lack of adequate drainage. State Act 51 funding for roads is channelled through Wayne County. The County has a policy which does not permit use of Act 51 money for drainage projects which may be related to road improvements. Consequently, improvements to Macomb Street and other roads have been stalled because of lack of adequate drainage, and the lack of adequate funding to pay for necessary drainage improvements. It is clear that certain roads, such as Macomb Street, must be improved if the Township is to accomplish the economic development goals set forth in the master plan. The solution to the funding problem must come from the political arena. Two suggestions are set forth: - The Township could petition the new Wayne County government to change their policy regarding expenditure of Act 51 money, or the Township could take the necessary actions to become a City, whereupon it would receive the Act 51 funding directly from the state. 2. Macomb Street Plan. The previous master plan called for closure of a portion of Macomb Street, construction of a .. ring road," and creation of a commercial mall. There is presently very little support for this design concept. The business community is particularly opposed to the '"ring road" plan. Clearly, such a plan would be extremely difficult to implement, especially with so much resistance. Furthermore, it is questionable whether a plan for a retail mall is justified, based on the size of the commercial district that could be supported by the projected population of the Township. The ring road plan did have value from one perspective: It would have provided access to landlocked parcels north and south of Macomb Street. Gray Drive has apparently been platted for the entire distance between East River Road and Meridian, providing access to landlocked parcels on the north side of Macomb (although Gray Drive presently has not been constructed all the way to Meridian). The need for access to landlocked parcels south of Macomb Street still exists. One option would be to construct a secondary access road on Township-owned property from Meridian Road east to a point east of the Township Hall. 3. Excessive Traffic. The master plan identifies only one road, Manchester Road, where excessive traffic is a recurring problem. This road is used as a collector road by people travelling to or from Meridian Road, even though Manchester Road is intended to be used as a local residential street. Manchester Road is used instead of Groh Road and East River Road, which are not as quick, convenient, and in the case of Groh Road, as well maintained. - 74 - �r Excessive traffic on residential streets can be dealt with in a number of ways. First, alternate collector routes (such as Groh Road) should be bettermaintained so they can adequately serve the intended volume of traffic. Other measures involve attempts to discourage traffic from entering residential streets: Post speed limits on entry to residential streets. Construct street entrance necking to prevent entry onto a residential street from an adjoining arterial. This technique involves extension of the planting strip at one corner of the intersection, restricting street width to permit only one-way exit from the residential street. Install signs to limit residential streets to local access only. - Upgrade arterials and collector streets to carry greater traffic volumes. Provide for curved or winding residential streets in new residential developments. Manchester Road provides straight access from East River Road to Meridian. - Construct or reconstruct residential streets using narrower de-emphasize vehicular use and encourage driver caution. width to Utilize plantings in the right-of-way to visually de-emphasize the vehicular function of residential streets. Implementation of these alternatives is costly, possibly involving installation of new curbs, realignment of existing curbs, adjustment of aanhole covers, relocation of drainage inlets, signage, and landscaping. Therefore, it is imperative that any recommended set of alternatives be tested under the observation of the Township Engineer during a trial period prior to permanent installation. On weekends during the warm weather months, traffic is very heavy on East and West River Roads. This traffic is attributed to sightseerers, and would be very difficult to control without illegally restricting access on public County primary roads. The traffic tie-ups on the two bridges probably acts as a self-regulatory measure to deter even more sightseerers from entering the island. 4. Parke Lane. Currently, the Township is served by three primary north-south collector roads: Meridian road, East River Road, and West River Road. A fourth north-south collector road, Parke Lane, was designated in the previous master plan. Accordingly, the Township has required developers of property along the Parke Lane route to construct the road across their property when they develop the land. · - 75 - �r Completion of Parke Lane would be an asset to the Township's road network. The Township has two options concerning Parke Lane: - The Township can continue its existing policy, resulting in construction of Parke Lane segment-by-segment over a number of years. - The Township could seek new sources of funding to complete the road in its entirety. Public initiative may eventually be required anyway to complete certain segments where the owners have no intention of developing the land within a reasonable period of time. s. Airport and Comaerce Park Transportation. One issue concerning development of the airport commerce park which was analyzed was the desire to provide airplanes with direct access to buildings in the park. In concept, an executive would be able to fly into the Grosse Ile airport and taxi up to the front door of a business. The existing configuration of roads and airport does not facilitate such a plan. In fact, the existing configuration of roads and airport segregates the airplanes from the commerce park. A new road configuration, calling for re-routing or closing a segment of Groh Road, would be required. If Groh Road was re-routed around the north side of the commerce park to Meridian Road, then the commerce park would have unobstructed access to and from the airport. Such a modification of Groh Road would be very costly in relation to the positive effects it would have on airport development. Vehicular access to the commerce park is another important concern. Presently, primary access is via Grosse Ile Parkway and Meridian Road. Meridian Road has 120-foot right-of-way, and is scheduled for resurfacing and shoulder work by the County. This route should be able to adequately carry the traffic generated by new development in the commerce park. 6. Bridge Traffic. The ability of the two bridges to handle the traffic generated by a growing Township is an important concern. Presently, the level of traffic over the bridges is particularly problematic in the warm weather months, when the bridges open every half hour to allow boats to pass, causing extended delays for vehicles waiting to cross. Such delays create an inconvenience for passenger vehicles and deter prospective businesses from locating in the commerce park. To a limited extent, better traffic control would alleviate some of the congestion. Apparently, signalization at the intersection of Grosse Ile Parkway and West River Road would improve the flow of traffic when the bridge re-opens to allow vehicular traffic to cross. - 76 - �r In the long-term, the problem of excessive bridge traffic can be dealt with only through major modifications to the existing bridges, or construction of a third bridge. The bridge at the north end of the island possibly would carry more traffic if it were not a toll bridge. Construction of a high-rise bridge that would allow boats to pass underneath does not appear to be a viable option, because so much land would be required for the bridge approach ramp. A high-rise bridge, though, would allow uninterrupted passage of boats without having to close the bridge to vehicular traffic. Another alternative that has been suggested would involve construction of a third bridge on a causeway, extending from Groh Road across the river to Gibraltar. The river is relatively shallow in this area. This alternative would provide direct access to the commerce park. However, a causeway would prevent passage of boats into the West Channel at the south end of the island. 7. Regional Transportation Issues. Many critical transpora tion problems faced by Grosse Ile actually exist off of the island. Possibly the most important transportation issue concerns access to and from I-75. Both the north and south routes to I-75 involve heavy traffic, extended delays at traffic signals, and travel on inadequately-maintained roads. The lack of quick, convenient access to I-75 is often cited as a deterrent to development of some types of businesses in the Grosse Ile commerce park. A proposal to make major improvements to West Road, east from I-75, is being studied by the state and county. The Township should continue to monitor this proposal as it is studied, and petition for improvements that would directly benefit Grosse Ile. For example, if West Road is improved, Grosse Ile would benefit from upgrading of the Jefferson Avenue connection to West Road. 8. Public Transportation. Currently, no public transportation is provided to or from Grosse Ile. Most residents who wish to use public transportation board a SEMTA bus in Trenton. Presently, it is unclear how much demand exists on Grosse Ile for public transportation. If the lack of public transportation is a sufficiently serious concern, it should be addressed as the community continues to urbanize. 9. Alternate Modes of Transportation. Grosse Ile is one of only a few communities in southeastern Michigan that has the option of developing two additional viable modes of transportation: water and air transportation. Public commuter transportation by these modes may even be more viable than conventional ground-based public transportation. From time-to-time in the past, people have suggested various types of air and water transportation that may be viable on Grosse Ile. For example, a proposal for hydrofoil commuter transportation between Grosse Ile and downtown Detroit has been suggested. Proposals for commuter helicopter transportation are set forth in many planning documents from the past. GI095 - 77 - �r Community FacllHles Fire Station The present Grosse Ile fire station facilities were constructed in 1960 as part of a total township hall complex and no longer serve the needs of the fire department due to increased demand for emergency and fire protection services. The present facility does not have adequate space to accommodate existing and future required vehicles. Office space is very inadequate and houses several incongruous functions within a single room. Kitchen facilities are deficient and an improved lounge and training area is needed. There is a need for improved shower facilities for men and provision of shower facilities for women fire fighters. Sleeping areas are totally lacking and should be provided if fire fighters must remain at the fire station overnight during severe weather. Storage facilities are totally inadequate and there are no areas provided for conducting maintenance and repair work on fire vehicles and equipment. Adjoining parking facilities are not sufficient for fire personnel. The design and configuration of the present station also requires returning fire apparatus to back into the fire station causing potential collisions. The township of Grosse Ile is currently undergoing extensive urbanization in which many new residential units are being constructed. These residential units will place increased demands on the fire depa r tment which is already operating out of an inadequate facility. Four sites were initially considered for location of a new fire station. These sites included Macomb Road, Parkway at Meridian Road, Meridian at Lowrie, and Meridian Road between Macomb and Parkway. The first three sites were rejected because of traffic congestion or other conflicts. The site at Meridian and Lowrie also has high tension wires running through the parcel. The fourth alternative, a site located on Meridian between Macomb and Parkway, was selected for detailed consideration for a new station location because it provides adequate room for expansion and because the intersection light at Macomb and Parkway could be controlled from a central location in the fire station for emergency response. This parcel is presently owned by the township. The proposed location on Meridian Road should not cause any signficant increase in travel response time to critical locations on Grosse Ile. In fact, this site location should help reduce response time to many high value properties in the community. The following list shows the distance from the proposed site to high value developments on Grosse Ile: 1. 2. 3. 4. Industrial Park, Grosse Ile Airport Macomb Street, Business District Grosse Ile High School, Grey Drive Parke Lane School, Parke Lane/Church Road - 78 - = 1. 75 miles .2 - .75 miles • 80 miles = 2.5 miles = = �r "I 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. East River Elementary St. James Church, East River Road Presbyterian Church, Horsemill Road Baptist Church, Meridian Road St. Thomas Lutheran Church Community Center (Vacant) Sacred Heart Catholic Church Grosse Ile Yacht Club Elbamar Boat Club Ford Yacht Club Waters Edge Golf Club Grosse Ile Golf & Country Club West Shores Golf Club Meridian School 1.5 1.25 3.25 .1 = 1.60 = 2.0 = 2.5 = 4.00 = 3.75 = 3.50 = 1.25 = .25 = 1.25 = 1.0 = = = = miles miles miles mile miles miles miles miles miles miles miles miles miles miles The Grosse Ile Fire Department needs a fire station of approximately 12,000 square feet which will provide adequate office space for the fire chief and fire marshall, a conference/meeting room, a training/classroom, adequate storage facilities, a sleeping area for emergency situations that require personnel to be on all-night standby as well as to serve future paid on-call personnel. The apparatus area of the new fire station should have four front doors, allowing rescue vehicles to be back to back so they are capable of responding without interrupting the flow of fire vehicles. The apparatus areas should be 75 feet by 75 feet to allow for larger apparatus if needed. At least 50 parking spaces should be provided to meet the full requirements of the department. The proposed site on Meridian should provide adequate room for such a facility and could also provide for future expansion. However, as the community continues to grow there may be a future need for one or two branch fire stations, particularly in the area of the industrial park. All necessary utilities are available to this proposed site, including gas, water, and electricity. An engineering analysis would be required to determine sanitary and storm sewer requirements for development of the site. At the present time, the entire area between Parkway Road and Macomb Street on the east of Meridian is vacant wooded land. It would be desirable to maintain the wooded, natural image of this property as much as possible when developing a new fire station facility. This proposed site for a new fire station to serve Grosse Ile Township should be submitted to the fire insurance underwriters organization for review and evaluation before a final decision is made on the location. Through careful site planning and design, it will be possible to build the facility while preserving the open space wooded character of this land parcel. Police Headquarters The present police department facilities are over 25 years old and do not provide adequate space or facilities to meet the current or projected police - 79 - �r "I department space requirements. As Grosse Ile Township continues to urbanize, the community service requirements of the police department will increase substantially. The police department should have a modern facility which includes a dispatch area; a squad room; offices for the police chief, inspector, lieutenant, and two detectives; a juvenile office; an interrogation room; and a combination training and conference room. The facility should also have six jail cells; shower facilities; a booking area; a breathalizer room; a storage area; a property room; a weapons and equipment room; a general supplies room; an evidence room; a visitors area; and a garage for six to eight cars equipped with a wash rack, utility room, and auto parts storage area. There should also be a record bureau storage area, an exercise room, an indoor gun range, and an area for personnel to eat lunch. Such a full service police department facility could not be provided within the existing cramped space in the township hall. A new police headquarters could also be located on the proposed site for a new fire station on Meridian between Macomb and Parkway. It is estimated that a new police headquarters would require building space of approximately 9,000 square feet. Secondary access to the new police headquarters from Macomb Street could be provided with construction of a connecting road to the existing township hall driveway. Because of the centrality of this location and its excellent accessibility to major throughfares, both a new police headquarters and a fire station could serve the community very efficiently from this site. The site also has adequate room for expansion if needed in the future. Township Ball Administrative Office Facilities If the fire and police departments are relocated to new facilities, the existing area occupied by these departments could be redesigned to serve other township hall requirements. There is a need for an expanded and improved township meeting room. The existing fire department garage space could be redesigned for use as a meeting room for the township board and other township commissions. The Township Department of Public Works, the Building Department, and the Recreation Department all require additional space. These departments could be accommodated in the space vacated by police and fire functions. Department of Public Vorks Garage and Yard Grosse Ile Township needs a Department of Public Works facility. It is recommended that a DPW maintenance garage and yard be constructed on the land area directly behind the existing township hall. A detailed architectural study would be required to determine the actual building space requirements and the precise location of the facilities. Library Services Grosse Ile Township currently is provided with library services by the City - 80 - �I of Trenton Library. The Trenton Library is part of the Wayne-Oakland Library Federation. Library services provided by the Trenton Public Library to Grosse Ile residents have been of a high quality and it is recommended that this arrangement be continued in the future. The cost of building and operating a separate library facility on Grosse Ile would be very high. If the community wishes to develop library facilities on Grosse Ile in the future, it is recommended that the school system play the major role in providing such facilities. GlllS - 81 - �I Recreation INVENTORY OF EXISTING RECREATION FACILITIES AND PROGRAMS Grosse Ile Township does not have an extensively developed public recreation system. Most of the recreation facilities in the community are operated by the school system or by private recreation providers. This approach is realistic because of the limited financial resources of the township government and the premium placed on recreation land within the community. The major recreation facilities consist of public school recreation facilities and buildings, the Water's Edge Country Club, the Bird Sanctuary, and various undeveloped parks. Water's Edge Country Club The township of Grosse Ile operates a private country club for the recreation and enjoyment of the community's residents. The Water's Edge Country Club is a municipal family club with facilities for golf, boating, and swimming. It contains a swimming pool, a bar and restaurant, a driving range, and provides boating facilities. The Water's Edge Country Club is currently working on rejoining the Interlake Yachting Association so that its members can enjoy the facilities and privileges of other yacht clubs. The club is self-supporting from its own revenues which are not comingled with other township rec r eation funds. To help assure that the club will be self supporting, the township has offered resident memberships to residents of Grosse Ile and Trenton, and non-resident memberships to residents of other communities. The present facilities of the Water's Edge Country Club include a nine hole golf course, a 55 boat well marina with winter storage and haul-out facilities. It also includes an olympic size swimming pool, a club house with wet bar and snack facilities, and a pro-shop. The club house is available for catered parties and social group meetings. The club has 980 general members. Bird Sanctuary The Bird Sane tuary is a 12. 7 acre parcel of land bordered by the Thorofare Canal on the east, Horsemill Road on the south, and Thorofare Road on the west. The area is being preserved in its natural wooded state as a bird and wild life habitat. Undeveloped Parks Grosse Ile Township owns some areas which could be used for parks, but are as yet undeveloped. The township owns a former dump site which is a 12. 25 acre parcel laying between East River Road and the Elba-Mar Boat Club with frontage on a canal. There are also various road ends which are owned by the township and are literally small parcels of land on the river side of the river roads where east-west roads end. - 82 - �I RECREATION ACREAGE ON GROSSE ILE Private Acres 3.0 Grosse Ile Golf & Country Club 148.4 Water's Edge Country Club 75.0 West Shores Golf & Country Club 118. 7 12.7 Grosse Ile Yacht Club 4.0 Bird Sanctuary 9.4 Public & Semi-Public Community & Youth Center Acres Harian Park 3.5 Elba-Mar Boat Club Bertha Park 1.0 Ford Yacht Club 58.9 12.3 Hickory Island Yacht Club 0.8 Township Dump 63.6 Hickory Island Park 8.8 Schools 349.0 171. l Public and Private Total - 520.1 Acres GI078 - 83 - �I OOTDOOR RECR.F.ATION FACILITIES AT P0BLIC SCHOOLS U - Undeveloped D - Developed Activity Parke Lane Meridian Site Size (acres) 12.4 10.0 Softball Softball Baseball Baseball Basketball Football Football Track Tennis Playlot Playground East River (22.0 Middle School Senior High Totals combined) 52.3 96.7 2 2 2 7 3 D u 2 1 2 D 2 1 u 0 1 1 1 D 1 u 1 1 6 1 l 1 1 l l 3 1 1 1 6 3 3 Sacred Heart School, a parochial facility, has one developed baseball diamond, which is used for little league baseball and maintained by G.I.R,A. INDOOR RECREATION FACILITIES AT PUBLIC SCHOOLS Activity Gym Basketball Court Shower Facilities Multi-Purpose Room Kitchen Cafeteria Rest Rooms Auditorium Library Arts & Crafts Home Ee Shop Parke Lane Meridian 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 tt East River Middle School 2 2 1 Senior High 1 1 l 1 tt 1 1 ttSmall PTA Kitchen GI069 - 84 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Totals 3 5 3 3 3 2 5 1 3 2 2 2 �r Private Recreational Facilities on Grosse Ile 1. Grosse Ile Golf and Country Club Facilities: 2. 18 hole golf course Pro Shop Swimming Pool Club House Practice Range 2 Tennis Courts West Shore Golf & Country Club Facilities: 18 hole golf course Practice Range Pro Shop Waterfront area but no docks Club House 3. Grosse Ile Yacht Club Fae 111 ties: 4. 250 boat docks Club House 270 boat docks Club House Ford Yacht Club Facilities: 6. Club House Elba-Mar Boat Club Facilities: 5. 150 boat docks Hickory Island Yacht Club All must be residents of Hickory Island. Facilities: 25 boat docks GI076 - 85 - No Club House �Ill! 1111:NION -- • , ,· , / '- ___ .t:::::::::;,-, / ........--.,: · -~ ... , - ' ·..... '*--· ,· IIMIMEW ,,/ .,, . WVN()()lll ·-·-. ·,. ' -- - - ·-·-·•. ·-' ·, ~-----~---__ . \.d i: \ on.o., -.A..-__ - - -- - ~ -- = - --:::::::-,, C...._.t. -==-=~~ ~ ~ - I: ,::,,,-- \ - ,~ ·-- , ,. ..... , ~/ . . -- r:-~----=s ~ <Eiilii: > >-::»,,- - ..-1!!!"- --- - - 5·---- - ~ ~ ----- ---°""°" --------------------:~i----------- 11111111 I. 2. ). 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 . II. 12 . 13. Map10 14 . 15. 16. 17. 18. EXISTING RECREATION FACILITIES Township of Grosse lie Wayne~ Michigan Masa.Plan-1917 .... ~ ._ .... ~--- - ffi Ford Yacht Club Hickory laland Park Hickory Island Yacht Club Grosae Ile Yacht Club Township Du ■ p Elba-Kar Boat Club Nerldlan School Water's Edge Country Club Grosse lie Gulf & Country Club West Shores Golf & Country Club Senior Hlxh School Nlddle School East River School Parke Lane School Bird Sanctuary Narlon Park Bertha Park co-unity & Youth Center Gelold Luedtke and APociatN, lncofpolae.d IMbonPlanning~ DetlOi1, Michigan �GOALS FOR THE GROSSE ILE RECREATION COMPONENT 1. Recreation facilities and services should meet the needs of all components of the Grosse Ile population including preschool and elementary school children, teenagers, adults, the elderly, and the handicapped. 2. Recreation facilities and programs should be based on the preferences of Grosse Ile Township residents as reflected in the recently completed recreation opinion survey. 3. Recreation facilities should reflect the unique island geography of Grosse Ile Township and its extensive exposure to the waterfront. 4. Recreation facilities on Grosse Ile should be designed so that they not only provide recreation opportunities, but also contribute to the aesthetic quality and ecological balance of the township. 5. Development of future recreation based on a sound fiscal policy. 6. There should be full exploration of privatization of recreation facilities. Privatization involves a private company developing or opera ting recreation facilities on public recreation land or private recreation land for a profit. 7. Grosse Ile Township should explore innovative funding approaches such as a recreation gifts catalog, adopt-a-park, friends of the park, park trust funds, user fees and other approaches. 8. The township should encourage improved design of recreation facilities and equipment to reduce ongoing maintenance costs. 9. The effective hours of usage of major recreation facilities should be extended where possible through installation of lighting facilities. 10. The township should acquire and reserve, in advance, those land and water areas which are needed to meet both existing and future recreation needs of the residents. 11. The township should establish an active recreation commission which can plan and operate recreation facilities and services. 12. Grosse Ile Township should cooperate with surrounding downriver communities in the mutual sharing and programming of recreation facilities in order to avoid duplication and unnecessary expense. 13. Both the township government and the Grosse Ile school system should work cooperatively in the planning and programming of recreation facilities for the total benefit of community residents. facilities GI075 - 87 - and programs should be �BASIS FOR THE ua.r.ATIOH ACTION PROGRAM During preparation of the master plan, a detailed survey of recreation needs and opinions was completed. Response to the survey of recreation services revealed that, in general, residents perceive the need for improvement to recreation facilities and services offered in Grosse Ile Township. The survey indicated that respondents would be supportive of a broad range of recreation and leisure programs, even though the respondents or their families may not necessarily use the programs. Support for the programs was found to be related to income and age of the household members. Respondents to the survey indicated the need for certain outdoor recreation facilities, particularly facilities that would provide family or individual pleasure, rather than facilities for group activities. Respondents expressed less of a need for indoor recreation facilities, although there appears to be strong support for an indoor pool and senior citizen center. The survey revealed that most households possess an assortment of recreation equipment, indicating a broad range of leisure-time pursuits. In the absence of public recreation facilities on the island, the survey revealed that many residents pursue their leisure-time interests at nearby regional park facilities, recreation facilities operated by neighboring communities, or at private recreation facilities. Respondents to the survey suggested fifty specific improvements to recreation facilities which they would like to see implemented. The most frequently cited improvement was construction of a indoor swimming pool. Many other suggested improvements focused on maintenance, improvement, and increased usage of existing recreation facilities. Respondents also cited the need for programs for children and teens. Respondents to the survey of recreation services were interviewed by telephone during February and March of 1987. The 350 respondents were selected at random from a complete list of households compiled by the Township. A random sample of 350 respondents assures a margin of error of 5 percent, with a 95 percent confidence interval. Consequently, the survey results are considered reliable measures of residents attitudes concerning a broad range of recreation issues. Evaluation of Existing Recreation Facilities and Services Respondents to the survey were first asked to rate a list of sixteen recreation facilities and services as either Superior, Adequate, or Inadequate. In general, the highest-rated facilities and services are oriented toward adults. Based on the ratings, it appears that recreation facilities for teens and children are not as well developed. The ratings also indicate that outdoor - 88 - �recreation land and public waterfront access are perceived as being inadequate. As indicated in Table 6, only five facilities and services were rated Superior or Adequate by a majority of respondents. These include the Water's Edge golf course and marina; maintenance of ballfields, basketball courts, and similar athletic facilities; recreation facilities for adults; recreation and leisure-time programs for adults; and, music, visual arts, and cultural facilities and programs. Generally, these facilities and services would appeal most to adults, except for ballfields, basketball courts, and athletic facilities, which would also appeal to younger age groups. Recreation facilities and leisure-time programs for teens and public access to the waterfront were rated inadequate by a majority of the respondents. Between forty and fifty percent of the respondents rated the following facilities and services as inadquate: the amount of developed outdoor recreation land; recreation facilities and leisure-time programs for children; recreation and leisure-time programs in general; and, recreation facilities for the handicapped. These ratings reveal that overall improvement to recreation facilities and services is needed, but particular attention should be focused on waterfront access and the leisure-time needs of children, teens, and the handicapped. The response to question 1 revealed that many residents lack knowledge about recreation facilities and programs for two groups, the handicapped and elderly. However, a majority of those who rated recreation facilities and leisure-time activities for the handicapped and the elderly rated them as inadequate. Among all households, those teens exhibited the greatest amount of dissatisfaction with facilities and services (see Table 7). Almost three-quarters of all which contain teens ranked facilities and leisure-time services for inadequate. A majority of households containing teens ranked an seven facilities or services as inadequate. Iapact of Age on ltespondenta • Opinions. containing recreation households teens as additional Households containing young children (up to 12 years of age) households with members between the ages of 40 and 59 also exhibited a level of dissatisfaction with many recreation facilities and services. lowest level of dissatisfaction with recreation facilities and services exhibited by households with members who are over 60 years of age. and high The was Impact of lncoae on ltespondents' Opinions. Households with an annual income of between $70,000 and $99,999 revealed the highest level of dissatisfaction with recreation facilities and services (see Table 8). Between seventy and eighty percent of all households in this income category consider recreation facilities and services for teens as inadequate. A high proportion of households in this income category also consider the amount of outdoor recreation land, recreation facilities and programs for children, and recreation - 89 - �TABLE 6 EVALUATION OF UISTING ll!CIU'.ATION FACILITIES AND SERVICES Superior Adequate Inadequate No Answer The amount Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation of developed outdoor recreation land and leisure-time programs in general facilities for children and leisure-time programs for children facilities for teens 5.1% 3.1 2.9 2.0 1.7 36.3% 38.0 26.6 28.0 16.0 49.7% 45.7 49.4 43.4 57.7 8.9% 13.1 21.l 26.6 24.6 Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation elderly and leisure-time programs for teens facilities for adults and leisure-time programs for adults facilities for the elderly and leisure-time programs for the 1.1 4.9 2.9 2.3 17.7 48.0 46.9 21.7 52.0 34.9 34.6 37.7 29.1 12.3 15.7 38.3 3 .1 24.0 31.4 41.4 0.9 6.9 40.6 51.7 0.6 6.6 38.9 54.0 12.3 41.4 34.0 12.3 19.1 59.4 8.6 12.9 10.3 51.7 23.4 5.4 29.4 14.6 53.7 Recreation facilities for the handicapped Recreation and leisure-tiae programs for the handicapped Music, visual arts, and cultural facilities and programs The Township-owned golf course and marina (Water's Edge Golf Club) Maintenance of ballfields, basketball courts, and similar athletic facilities Public access to the waterfront Baaed ou questioe 1 of the Survey of ~ec.reatioo Serri.ces 9 which reads u follows: First, I would like you to rate existing recreation services on Grosse Ile. I am going to read to you a list facilities and services. As I read each one, please tell it should be rated SUPERIOR, ADEQUATE, or INADEQUATE. all leisure-time services now being provided. - 90 - facilities and of leisure-time me if you think Please consider 11.4 �TABLE 7 EVALUATION OF EXISTING RECREATION FACILITIES AND SERVICES BASED ON AGE OOKPOSITION OF HOUSFJIOLDS Ase Catesor;t: ....ID Up_ to 12 13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 60 or Older The amount Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation of developed outdoor recreation land and leisure-time programs in general facilities for children and leisure-time programs for children facilities for teens 56. U: 56.1 62.6 56.1 61.7 56.8% 58.6 62.2 55.9 74.8 49.4% 44.3 50.6 43.0 63.3 53.7% 50.0 55.6 47.2 54.6 51.7% 46.4 48.3 44.5 63.6 42.2% 36.7 43.3 34.4 52.2 Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation and leisure-time programs for teens facilities for adults and leisure-time programs for adults facilities for the elderly 55.1 35.5 39.3 33.6 74.8 36.9 40.5 44.1 59.5 34.2 29.1 44.3 48.1 32.4 35.2 34.3 58.4 38.3 39.2 41.1 37.8 35.6 28.9 31.1 28.0 39.3 36.9 55.0 32.9 36.7 25.9 38.0 34.9 43.1 25.6 40.0 39.3 52.3 34.2 37.0 42.1 36.7 42.1 40.5 36.7 32.4 35.9 25.6 10.3 12.6 6.3 8.3 9.6 5.6 22.4 51.4 9.8 60.4 15.2 50.6 19.4 51.9 13.4 57.9 8.9 47.8 Recreation and leisure-time programs for the elderly Recreation facilities for the handicapped Recreation and leisure-time programs for the handicapped Music, visual arts, and cultural facilities and programs The Township-owned golf course and marina (Water's Edge Golf Club) Maintenance of ballfields, basketball courts, and similar athletic facilities Public access to the waterfront 'Ibis table indicates the percentage of houaebolda containing aeabers in the age categories listed which indicated that existing recreation facilities and services are ioadeq-te. �TABLE 8 EVALUATION OF EXISTING RECB.EATION FACILITIES AND SERVICES BASFJ> OM AMNUAL !NOONE OF uoosmoLDS than $30,000 Less The amount Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation '-D N Recreation Recreation Recreation Recreation of developed outdoor recreation land and leisure-time programs in general facilities for children and leisure-time programs for children facilities for teens and leisure-time programs for teens facilities for adults and leisure-time programs for adults facilities for the elderly Recreation and leisure-time programs for the elderly Recreation facilities for the handicapped Recreation and leisure-time programs for the handicapped Music, visual arts, and cultural facilities and programs The Township-owned golf course and marina (Water's Edge Golf Club) Maintenance of ballfields, basketball courts, and similar athletic facilities Public access to the waterfront Annual Income $50,000$30,000$69,999 $49,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or Hore 38.9% 38.9 44.4 38.9 50.0 51.0¾ 46.9 53.1 44.9 71.4 63.2% 60.5 61.8 55.3 60.5 66.7% 58.3 69.4 63.9 77 .8 47.1% 44.l 47.1 44 .1 58.8 44.4 44.4 44.4 44.4 59.2 38.8 38.8 36.7 57.9 36.8 38.2 40.8 72. 2 44.4 55.6 55.6 50.0 26.5 23.5 38.2 38.9 44.4 34.7 49.0 32.9 51.3 44.4 52.8 26.5 38.2 44.4 46.9 47.4 52.8 38.2 27.8 34.7 43.4 44.4 38.2 o.o 4 .1 13.2 19.4 5.9 22.2 50.0 12.2 67.3 17.1 56.6 16.7 69.4 11.8 47.1 This table indlcatetl the percentage of bouaebolda in each incoae category which indicates that exlatlag recreation facllltlea and services are inadequate. �facilities and programs in general as inadequate. A high proportion of households with an annual income of between $50,000 and $69,999 also consider many recreation facilities and programs as inadequate. In particular, this income category appears to be most dissatisfied with facilities and programs for children, the amount of developed outdoor recreation land, and facilities and programs in general. Households with an annual income of more than $99,999 generally are most satisfied with the adequacy of existing recreation facilities and services. Households in this income category are best able to purchase their own recreation facilities or use private recreation facilities and services in the area. Support for Recreation and Leisure Prograa.s The second question of the survey asked respondents to indicate whether they would support 32 recreation and leisure programs on Grosse Ile. The response to this question gives an indication of the types of programs where Township involvement is considered appropriate by residents. Response to the second question revealed widespread support for a broad range of programs (see Table 9). Apparently, residents have a desire to address some of the deficiencies identified in the first survey question. Over seventy percent of the respondents indicated they would support the following programs: programs for the elderly, continuing education programs, supervised teen dances, baseball leagues, swimming lessons, exercise programs, and supervised playground activities. Between sixty and seventy percent of the respondents indicated they would support an additional thirteen programs, including: football leagues, soccer leagues, basketball leagues, tennis lessons, cross-country skiing lessons, lee skating lessons, golf lessons, sailing and boating lessons, summer day camps, visual and performing arts programs, hobby crafts, personal computer instruction, and off-island community outings and travel programs. The proportion of respondents who indicated they would not support five of the programs exceeded the proportion who would support the programs. These five programs are: bowling leagues, community chorus, cards and board games, self-defense instruction, and dog obedience classes. Iapact of Age of Respondents• Opinions. Households with young children (up to 12 years of age) and with members between the ages of 30 and 39 exhibited the highest level of support for almost all recreation and leisure programs (see Table 10). The only exception to this general pattern involved programs that have little appeal for children, such as community chorus, community youth band, visual and performing arts, programs for the elderly, self-defense, and dog obedience programs. - 93 - �TABLE 9 SUPPORT FOR RECREATION AND LEISURE PROGRAMS Yes Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camp After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts programs Gardening Cards and board games Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs No No Answer 73.4% 63.4 67.7 69.1 68.0 26.6% 36.6 31. 7 30.6 32.0 0.0% 50.6 68.9 64.9 57.7 63.1 49.l 31.l 35.1 42.3 36.9 0.3 65.4 56.3 44.6 71.4 62.9 34.6 43.4 55.4 28.0 36.6 70.3 57.4 74.0 72.9 71.7 28.6 40.3 25.4 .27 .1 28.3 1.1 2.3 0.6 47.7 52.3 65.7 53.7 45.4 52.0 47.7 34.3 46.0 54.6 0.3 62.6 75.7 74.6 62.0 49.4 37.1 23.1 25.4 37.7 50.3 0.3 1.1 42.9 60.6 56.9 38.9 0.3 0.6 o.o 0.6 0.3 o.o o.o o.o o.o o.o o.o 0.3 o.o 0.6 0.6 o.o o.o o.o o.o 0.3 o.o o.o 0.3 0.3 Based on question 2 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which re.ads as follows: Now I am going to read to you a list of recreation and leisure programs. As I read each program, please tell me if you would support a program of this type on Grosse Ile. Please respond by answering YES or NO. - 94 - �TABLE 10 SUPPORT FOR R.ECRF.ATION AND LEISURE PROGRAMS BASE> ON AGE OOKPOSITION OF HOOSP'JIOLDS Age Categorr -13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 60 or Older 93.5% 83.2 89.7 86.9 86.0 84.77. 79.3 83.8 82.9 84.7 77 .2% 67.1 68.4 70.9 72.2 90.7i. 77 .8 86.l 83.3 81.5 73.7i. 64 .1 70.8 69.9 70.3 58.9% 47.8 47.8 53.3 45.6 67.3 83.2 85.0 69.2 78.5 62.2 80.2 77.5 64.9 78.4 53.2 73.4 65.8 64.6 64.6 65.7 84.3 81.5 73.1 75.0 50.2 71.3 65.1 55.0 64.6 33.3 46.7 48.9 51.l 47.8 84 .1 68.7 55.1 89.7 81.3 76.6 64.0 48.6 79.3 72. l 68.4 57.0 48.1 72.2 68.4 82.4 71.3 54.6 84.3 74.l 63.6 58.9 40.2 71.8 64.1 50.0 40.0 42.2 57.8 47.8 86.9 71.0 89.7 95.3 86.9 82.9 61.3 86.5 86.5 83.8 69.6 58.2 79.7 72.2 77. 2 83.3 73.1 90.7 89.8 86.1 72 .2 55.5 75.1 71.8 71.8 54.4 46.7 58.9 56.7 54.4 Up to 12 Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons \0 V, Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camps After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs - Continued - �TABLE 10 (Continued) Age Categori \0 (7\ Up_ to 12 13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 60 or Older Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts program Gardening Cards and board games 51.4 59.8 76.6 60.7 52.3 55.9 65.8 78.4 59.5 50.5 53.2 55.7 72.2 53.2 51.9 56.5 63.0 78.7 62.0 55.6 50.2 54 .1 69.4 54 .1 45.0 41.1 40.0 45.6 44.4 37.8 Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction 70.1 82.2 87.9 73.8 59.8 65.8 84.7 80.2 73.9 61.3 70.9 78.5 70.9 64.6 51.9 73.1 86.1 88.9 70.4 62.0 65.1 78.0 75.6 62.7 46.4 50.0 62.2 60.0 48.9 40.0 Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs 46.7 49.5 49.4 50.0 43.5 30.0 72.0 71.2 60.8 73.1 61.7 42.2 'nils table indicates the percentage of households containing ■eabers in the age categories listed which indicated they would support the recreation and leisure prograas listed. �Over ninety percent of the households with children indicated they would support swimming lessons and baseball leagues. Over eighty percent of the households with children indicated the would support football leagues, soccer leagues, basketball leagues, tennis lessons, cross-country skiing lessons, ice skating lessons, sailing and boating lessons, supervised playground activities, summer day camps, supervised teen dances, exercise programs, and continuing education programs. A similar level of support for these programs was e,pressed by households with members in the 30 to 39 year age category. These data clearly indicate that families with children are a strong base of support for a broad range of recreation programs. Households with members 60 years of age or older consistently expressed the lowest level of support for almost all recreation programs. The proportion of these households that indicated they would support recreation programs ranged from 30 percent in support of dog obedience classes to a high of 62.2 percent in support of programs for the elderly. lapact of Incoae on Respondents' Opinions. Households with an income of between $70,000 and $99,999 generally expressed the highest level of support for recreation and leisure programs (see Table 11). In this income category, the proportion of households in support exceeded ninety percent for the following programs: baseball leagues, tennis lessons, supervised playground activities, summer day camps, after-school ac ti vi ties for children, exercise programs, and visual and performing arts programs. Between eighty and ninety percent of the households in this category expressed support for another eleven recreation programs. Households with an annual income of less than $30,000 generally expressed the lowest level of support for most recreation programs. The proportion of these households in support of recreation programs ranged from a low of 38. 9 percent in support of dance lessons and golf lessons, to a high of 77.8 percent in favor of continuing education programs. The low level of support exhibited by this income group may be due to the fact that most respondents are sixty years of age or older, as noted in the discussion on demographics toward the end of this report. The survey revealed extreme disparities in the level of support expressed by different income groups with regards to certain recreation programs. For example, 91.7 percent of the households in the $70,000-$99,999 income category expressed support for supervised playground activities and summer day camps. Among other income categories, the level of support did not exceed 77.6 percent for supervised playground activities, and 65.8 percent for summer day camps. Similar disparities were noted in the level of the support for canoe rental, exercise programs, dance lessons, golf lessons, after-school activities for children, and visual and performing arts center. - 97 - �TABLE 11 SUPPORT POR. RECREATION AND LEISURE PROGRAMS BASm ON ANNUAL INCOME OP HOUSfllOLDS Less than $30,000 \D c:, Annual Income $50,000$30,000$69,999 $49,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or More 55.6% 44.4 55.6 55.6 44.4 75.5% 57.1 69.4 67.3 71.4 86.8% 71.1 80.3 78.9 82.9 91.7% 80.6 83.3 86.1 91.7 85.3% 73.5 76.5 76.5 82.4 44.4 50.0 55.6 38.9 38.9 57.1 77.6 75.5 61.2 65.3 59.2 77.6 69.7 60.5 68.4 77.8 86.1 83.3 75.0 83.3 58.8 73.5 79.4 58.8 70.6 50.0 50.0 55.6 66.7 55.6 71.4 55.1 46.9 77 .6 65.3 68.4 68.4 43.4 75.0 65.8 80.6 Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camps 61.l 91.7 91.7 76.5 52.9 41.2 73.5 64.7 After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs 72 .2 66.7 61.l 61.1 55.6 69.4 61.2 77.6 73.5 73.5 75.0 57.9 86.8 89.5 77.6 94.4 77.8 88.9 80.6 91.7 82.4 73.5 76.5 85.3 76.5 Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons - Continued - 80.6 �TABLE 11 {Continued) Less than $30,000 Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts programs Gardening Cards and board games 1.0 1.0 Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs Annual Income $50,000$30,000$69,999 $49,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or More 44.4 44.4 55.6 61.1 50.0 44.9 59.2 63.3 53.1 40.8 56.6 61.8 80.3 56.6 52.6 58.3 69.4 91.7 58.3 58.3 50.0 55.9 76.5 61.8 44.1 61.l 72.2 77 .8 66.7 50.0 67.3 81.6 75.5 61.2 46.9 72.4 88.2 82.9 73.7 55.3 77 .8 88.9 83.3 69.4 52.8 50.0 73.5 88.2 70.6 50.0 55.6 38.8 40.8 52.8 44 .1 61.l 65.3 72.4 77 .8 64.7 This table indicate• the percentage of household• in each incoae category vbicb indicated they vould support the recreation and leisure prograaa listed. �Use of Recreation and Leisure Prograas The third question of the survey asked respondents to indicate whether they or members of their families would actually use the 32 recreation and leisure programs listed in the second question. The expected level of use is not the only measure of need, nor should it be the only criterion used to determine whether a program should be implemented. Nevertheless, the response to this question indicates which programs would get the most use if implemented by the Township. Comparison of the responses to the second and third questions reveals that the strong support exhibited for a variety of recreation programs reflects the altruistic character of many residents: they are willing to support programs for the well-being of all residents, even though they or members of their family may not use the programs. For example, the level of support for supervised playground activities was 71.4 percent, but only 28.6 percent of the respondents indicated that members of their family would participate in the playground activities ( see Table 12). 72. 9 percent indicated support for swimming lessons, but only 44.3 percent of the respondents indicated that members of their household would enroll in the swimming lessons. The level of support exceeded the expected level of use of all recreation and leisure programs. It appears that continuing education programs and exercise programs would experience the highest level of use if implemented. Over sixty percent of the respondents indicated that members of their household would use these programs. Between fifty and sixty percent indicated that members of their household would participate in tennis lessons and cross-country skiing lessons. Between forty and fifty percent of the respondents indicated that members of their household would use the following programs: golf lessons, sailing and boating lessons, canoe rental, swimming lessons, visual and performing arts programs, hobby crafts, and personal computer instruction. Programs that would experience the lowest level of use include: a drop-off child care center, dog obedience classes, community youth band, football leagues, community chorus, summer day camps, and cards and board games. Less than 25 percent of the respondents indicated that members of their household would use these programs. Iaage of Age on Repondenta' Opinions. Housholds with young children ( up to 12 years of age) and with members between the ages of 30 and 39 would get the most use out of many recreation and leisure programs under consideration (see Table 13). Over seventy percent of the households with young children indicated they would use the following programs: swimming lessons, baseball leagues, soccer leagues, supervised playground activities, tennis lessons, ice ska ting lessons, after-school activities for children, and cross-country skiing lessons. - 100 - �TABLE 12 USE OF R.£CllEATION AND LEISURE PROGRAMS Yes Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camp After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs 35.4% 20.9 30.6 28.6 51.l 64.6% 79.1 69.l 71.4 48.6 36.3 54.9 38.6 38.3 49.7 63.7 45.l 61.4 61.7 45.7 42.3 30.3 28.6 24.6 54.3 57.7 69.4 71.4 75.l 27.4 14.9 36.9 44.3 62.6 84.6 63.1 55.7 37.l 23.7 Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts programs Gardening Cards and board games 18.9 47.4 36.0 25.1 Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs so.o 72.3 76.3 81.l 52.3 64.0 74.9 25.1 51.4 73.4 35.4 50.9 74.6 17.1 49.7 82.9 50.0 48.3 26.6 64.0 49.1 Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction No No Answer 0.0% o.o 0.3 o.o 0.3 o.o o.o o.o o.o 0.3 o.o o.o 0.3 o.o 0.3 0.3 0.6 o.o o.o 0.3 o.o o.o 0.3 o.o o.o 0.3 o.o 0.6 o.o 0.3 o.o o.3 Based on question 3 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which reads as follows: I am going to read through the same list of recreation and leisure programs. This time as I read each program please tell me whether you or members of your household would use the program. Please respond by answering YES or NO. - 101 - �TABLE 13 USE 01' UCR.UTIOM AND LEISURE PROGllAMS BASED OH AGE (X)tlP()SITIOH OF "11IE uoosmoLDS Age Categori ....0 N Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camps After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs 38.0 61. l 49.1 64.8 33.5% 19 .1 26.8 27.8 56.9 8.9% 5.6 7.8 6.7 18.9 41.8 57.0 38.0 39.2 55.7 53.7 62.0 63.0 49.1 57.4 38.3 60.3 37.8 38.3 56.0 11. l 33.3 17.8 24.4 28.9 66.7 57.7 36.0 34.2 26.1 41.8 41.8 35.4 19.0 20.3 61.l 52.8 33.3 61.l 51.9 48.3 46.9 30.1 21.5 17.7 20.0 20.0 25.6 7.8 6.7 36.9 13.5 73.0 53.2 74.8 20.3 15.2 22.8 35.4 67.1 52.8 28. 7 57.4 73.1 68.5 23.9 12.4 4.4 4.4 10.0 22.2 43.3 13-19 20-29 78.57. 52.3 77.6 64.5 75.7 54. 1i. 39.6 45.9 49.5 71.2 29 .1% 15.2 19.0 22.8 58.2 55.1 72.0 73.8 56.1 64.5 60.4 64.9 53.2 45.9 61.3 69.2 56 .1 41.1 76.6 69.2 72.0 41.1 67.3 84 .1 71.0 Up to 12 Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons 40-59 60 or Older - Continued - -30-39 64.8% 38.8 39.7 66.5 �TABLE 13 (Continued) Age Categor:t: Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts program Gardening Cards and board games Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction 0 w Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs Up to 12 13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 60 or Older 21.5 39.3 61.7 38.3 29.0 31.5 33.3 64.0 38.7 24.3 35.4 15.2 50.6 41.8 31.6 24.1 31. 5 56.5 31.5 26.9 28.7 20.6 53.6 40.2 25.4 16.7 5.6 31.1 26.7 25.6 55.1 15.0 69.2 60.7 39.3 58.6 16.2 72.1 64.9 37.8 58.2 26.6 60.8 58.2 21.5 49.1 16.7 66.7 53.7 36 .1 52.6 23.4 69.4 55.0 24.9 34.4 54.4 47.8 28.9 14.4 20.6 18.0 22.8 22.2 20 .1 10.0 57.9 55.0 50.6 58.3 49.8 43.3 I This table indicate• the percentage of household• containing aeabera in the age cat:egoriea liated which indicated they would use the recreation and leisure prograaa liated. �As expected, adult-oriented programs, such as community chorus, visual and performing arts activities, gardening, cards and board games, dog obedience classes, and off-island outings and travel programs would be used most by older age groups. In general, households composed of members over the age of 60 would use recreation and leisure programs the least. However, there are four programs which over forty percent of these households indicated they would use: programs for the elderly, continuing education programs, exercise programs, and off-island community outings and travel programs. Impact of Income on Respondents' Opinions. Households with an income of between $70,000 and $99,999 would generally get the most use from the recreation and leisure programs being considered (see Table 14). Over seventy percent of the households in this income category would use the following programs: tennis lessons, cross-country skiing lessons, exercise programs, visual and performing arts programs, and continuing education programs. Households with an annual income of between $50,000 and $99,999 also revealed they use many recreation and leisure programs. Households in this income category seem most interested in continuing education programs, exercise programs, tennis lessons, cross-country skiing lessons, visual and performing arts programs, and off-island community outings and travel programs. In general, recreation and leisure programs would be used least by those households with an annual income of less than $30,000. However, over fifty percent of these households indicated they would use the following programs: continuing education programs, off-island community outings and travel programs, programs for the elderly, and hobby crafts. In general, the same income groups which expressed support for specific recreation programs also would get the most use from the programs. This finding is important because it indicates that the lack of support expressed by the lowest income groups may be related to factors other than affordability, such as age of the lowest income group. If affordability was the only factor being considered, then it would have been expected that the lower income groups would express a low level of support but higher level of use of recreation programs. Needed Outdoor Recreation Facilities Respondents to the survey were asked if they thought seventeen new or additional outdoor recreation facilities are needed on Grosse Ile (see Table 15). A majority of respondents indicated the need for six outdoor facilities: bicycle paths, a jogging and exercise trail, hiking and cross-country ski trails, picnic areas, an ice rink, and a public outdoor swimming pool. In general, the survey revealed respondents' desire for additional recreation opportunities for family or individual pleasure, rather than for group - 104 - �TABLE 14 USE OF RECREATION AND LEISURE PROGRAMS BASm ON ANNUAL INootlE OF HOUSFJIOLDS ..... Annual Income $50,000$69,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or Hore 50.0% 27.6 44.7 42.1 63.2 41.7% 27.8 41. 7 36.1 75.0 47 .1% 29.4 32.4 41.2 64.7 38.8 63.3 42.9 36.7 46.9 48.7 61.8 40.8 47.4 53.9 55.6 72.2 52.8 50.0 58.3 41.2 61.8 50.0 41.2 55.9 27.8 27.8 33.3 11.1 11.1 46.9 42.9 38.9 30.6 30.6 56.6 50.0 23.7 43.4 30.3 63.9 69.4 44.4 38.9 41.7 50.0 41.2 26.5 32.4 29.4 11.1 5.6 11.1 27.8 33.3 26.5 18.4 30.6 57.1 65.3 42.1 23.7 56.6 59.2 68.4 38.9 25.0 52.8 47.2 80.6 35.3 17.6 35.3 41.2 76.5 Less than $30,000 $30,000$49,999 Baseball leagues Football leagues Soccer leagues Basketball leagues Tennis lessons 5.6% 5.6 16.7 5.6 11.1 44.9% 22.4 32.7 24.5 38.8 Horseback riding Cross-country skiing lessons Ice skating lessons Dance lessons Golf lessons 16.7 27.8 27.8 16.7 11.1 Sailing and boating lessons Canoe rental Bowling leagues Supervised playground activities Summer day camps After-school activities for children A drop-off child care center Supervised teen dances Swimming lessons Exercise programs 0 V, - Continued - �TABLE 14 (Continued) .... 0 (3\ Annual Income $50,00016~_999_ $70,000j99,999 $100,000 or More 36.8 31.6 64.5 40.8 23.7 33.3 22.2 80.6 41. 7 33.3 20.6 20.6 38.2 23.5 17.6 59.2 28.6 63.3 51.0 30.6 53.9 21.l 69.7 53.9 34.2 58.3 30.6 75.0 61.l 22.2 44.1 11.8 67.6 58.8 17.6 16.7 16.3 15.8 22.2 14.7 61.1 57.1 60.5 63.9 35.3 Less than $30 1 _Q90_ $30,000$49_1_999 Community chorus Community youth band Visual and performing arts programs Gardening Cards and board games 22.2 5.6 33.3 38.9 33.3 14.3 14.3 42.9 44.9 30.6 Hobby crafts Programs for the elderly Continuing education programs Personal computer instruction Self-defense instruction 50.0 55.6 66.7 33.3 22.2 Dog obedience classes Off-island community outings and travel programs This table indicate■ the percentage of households in each inco■e category which indicated they would uae the recreation and leisure prograas listed. �TABLE 15 NEEDED OUTDOOR RECREATION FACILITIES Yes Ballfields Soccer fields Tennis courts Racquetball courts A public outdooor swimming pool Playgrounds Football facilities Picnic areas An ice rink A jogging and exercise trail Hiking and cross-country ski trails Bicycle paths Botanical gardens Nature center Bridle trails facilities Public boat launching marina facilities Public No No Answer 24.3% 36.0 35.l 34.3 52.0 57.4% 42.9 54.6 48.9 44.6 18.3% 21.l 10,3 16.9 3.4 47.4 17.7 57.7 53.7 64.3 44.6 71.l 38.9 42.0 32.3 8.0 11.l 3.4 4.3 3.4 60.0 75.7 34.3 41.7 35.7 22.3 61.l 53.7 4.3 2.0 4.6 4.6 46.6 46.6 38.6 48.0 48.6 55.7 6.0 4.9 5.7 Based on question 4 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which reads as follows: Now I am going to read to you a list of outdoor recreation facilities. Please tell me if you think new or additional facilities of this type are needed on Grosse Ile by answering YES or NO. - 107 - �activities. A majority of respondents indicated they are not in favor of the following outdoor recreation facilities: outdoor football facilities, botanical gardens, ballfields, public marina facilities, tennis courts, and a nature center. In general, the outdoor facilities not favored by respondents serve special interest groups or would be used for field sports. Respondents may perceive that these facilities are already provided in sufficient quantity, or they may believe that private sec tor funding is more appropriate to satisfy the needs of special interest groups. I.apact of Age on Respondents• Opinions. The perceived need for certain outdoor recreation facilities seems to be related to the age of household members (see Table 16). As might be expected, the perceived need for ballfields, soccer fields, playgrounds, and football facilities is highest in households with children and teens. The perceived need for botanical gardens, a nature center, and bridle trails is highest in households composed of people in their twenties. The need for certain outdoor recreation facilities does not seem to be strongly related to age of household members. For example, a strong desire for the following facilities was revealed in most age groups: bicycle paths, jogging and exercise trails, and picnic areas. More than one age group also cited the need for an outdoor swimming pool, and ice rink, and hiking and cross-country ski trails. Compared to other age groups, households composed of members over the age of sixty perceived less of a need for most recreation facilities. Nevertheless, a majority of respondents in this age group cited the need for two facilities: bicycle paths and a jogging and exercise trail. I.apact of Inco■e on Respondents• Opinion. Households with an income of between $70,000 and $99,999 generally perceive the greatest need for outdoor recreation facilities (see Table 17). Over seventy percent of the households in this income category cited the need for the following facilities: bicycle pathways, a jogging and exercise trail, hiking and cross-country ski trails, picnic areas, playgrounds, and an ice rink. The attitude that recreation facilities are not needed seems to be related to income. Compared to other income groups, households with an annual income of less than $50,000 perceived less of a need for sports fields; tennis and racquetball courts; playgrounds; jogging, exercise, and cross-country ski trails; bicycle paths; botanical gardens; public boat launching facilities; and, public marina facilities. Higher income groups perceived less of a need for a public outdoor swimming pool, outdoor football facilities, picnic area, and an ice rink. It is interesting to note a wide disparity of opinion among income groups - 108 - �TABLE 16 NEEDED OUTDOOR R.ECRF.ATION FACILITIES BASE> ON AGE COMPOSITION OF uousmoLDS Age Categori Ballfields Soccer fields Tennis courts Racquetball courts A public outdoor swimming pool .... 0 \0 Playgrounds Football facilities Picnic areas An ice rink A jogging and exercise trail Hiking and cross-country ski trails Bicycle paths Botanical gardens Nature center Bridle trails Public boat launching facilities Public marina facilities Up to 12 13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 60 or Older 29.0 50.5 37.4 43.0 67.3 31.5 48.6 39.6 43.2 60.4 21.5 35.4 40.5 45.6 51.9 25.0 41. 7 30.6 38.9 62.0 22.5 36.4 36.8 37.3 51.2 24.4 26.7 36.7 24.4 44.4 63.6 18.7 70.1 69.2 71.0 51.4 25.2 69.4 62.2 73.0 55.7 22.8 58.2 55.7 69.6 57.4 14.8 68.5 65.7 69.4 44.5 17.2 57.9 51. 7 68.9 36.7 13.3 45 . 6 45.6 52.2 63.6 82.8 33.6 43.9 67.6 82.0 32.4 39.6 70.9 79.7 40.5 49.4 64 .8 77.8 37 .o 44.4 65.1 78.5 34.4 44.0 43.3 66.7 31.1 35.6 46.7 53.3 39.3 54 .1 45.9 41.4 57.0 45.6 32 . 9 49.1 55.6 40.7 50.2 48.3 40.2 37.8 36.7 35.6 This table indicates the percentage of households containing ■eabers in the age categories listed which indicated that the outdoor recreation facilities listed are needed. �TABLE 17 NEEDED OOTDOOll RECREATION FACILITIES BASED ON ANNUAL INCOttE OF HOOSDIOLDS Less than $30,000 Ballfields Soccer fields Tennis courts Racquetball courts A public outdoor swimming pool ........ 0 Playgrounds Football facilities Picnic areas An ice rink A jogging and exercise trail Hiking and cross-country ski trails Bicycle paths Botanical gardens Nature center Bridle trails Public boat launching facilities Public marina facilities Annual Income $50,000$30,000$69,999 $49,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or More 22.2% 27.8 38.9 50.0 61.l 24.5% 38.8 26.5 28.6 57.1 28.9% 43.4 38.2 32.9 53.9 33.3% 47.2 52.8 61.1 63.9 29.4% 35.3 44.1 44.1 55.9 55.6 22.2 61.1 50.0 44.4 53.1 20.4 61.2 59.2 67.3 55.3 18.4 71.1 63.2 71.1 72.2 19.4 75.0 72.2 88.9 55.9 23.5 58.8 47.1 88.2 33.3 55.6 55.6 55.6 67.3 83.7 28.6 51.0 69.7 84.2 39.5 47.4 80.6 91.7 47.2 61.1 73.5 88.2 41.2 52.9 50.0 44.4 38.9 51.0 61.2 44.9 57.9 52.6 42.1 63.9 69.4 63.9 55.9 50.0 50.0 This table indicates the percentage of households in each incoae category which indicated that the outdoor recreation facilities listed are needed. �concerning the need for certain recreation facilities. For example, over eighty-eight percent of the households with an annual income of $70,000 or more cited the need for a jogging and exercise trail, but only 45 percent of the households in the lowest income category recognized the same need. Similar disparity of opinion was revealed concerning the need for playgrounds and hiking and cross-country ski trails. Needed Indoor Recreation Facilities Respondents to the survey were asked if they thought eleven new or additional indoor recreation facilities are needed on Grosse Ile. A majority of respondents indicated the need for three indoor facilities: an indoor swimming pool, a senior citizen center, and a multi-purpose recreation center (see Table 18). A majority of respondents indicated the following indoor facilities are not needed: bowling facilities, banquet facilities, basketball courts, volleyball courts, a visual and performing arts center, racquetball courts, meeting rooms, an exercise and fitness center. While there seems to be a keen interest in having an indoor swimming pool, a senior center and a recreation/community center, there seems to be little interest in other indoor recreation facilities. These findings do not provide the Township with a clear indication of what facilities should be included in a senior center or recreation/community center if these centers are ever built. It is possible that the respondents did not realize that many indoor facilities included in the list could be incorporated into a senior center or recreation/community center. I.apact of Age on Respondents' Opinions. In general, the perceived need for indoor recreation facilities seems to be strongest in households with children or teens (see Table 19). For example, over seventy percent of these households cited the need for an indoor swimming pool and over sixty percent cited the need for a multi-purpose recreation center and senior citizen center. The perceived need for indoor recreation facilities seems to be weakest in households composed of people sixty years of age or older. Almost a majority of these households indicated no need for a senior citizen center and an indoor swimming pool. It is interesting to note, though, compared to other age categories, support for a senior citizen center was weakest among households composed of members who are sixty years of age or older. Impact of Income on Respondents' Opinions. Households with an income of between $70,000 and $99,999 generally perceive the greatest need for indoor recreation facilities (see Table 20). Over seventy percent of the households in this income category cited the need for the following facilities: a senior citizen center, a multi-purpose recreation center, and an indoor swimming pool. - 111 - �TABLE 18 NEEDED INDOOR RECREATION FACILITIES Yes No Multi-purpose recreation center Senior citizen center Meeting rooms An exercise and fitness center 53.7% 58.6 36.9 43.7 40.9% 34.6 57.4 52.9 5.4% 6.9 5.7 3.4 Banquet facilities An indoor swimming pool Racquetball courts Basketball courts 27.7 61.9 36.9 25.7 67.7 35.4 58.3 67.4 4.6 2.9 4.9 6.9 Volleyball courts Bowling facilities A visual and performing arts center 28.3 16.6 34.3 64.0 80.0 62.6 7.7 3.4 3.1 No Answer Based on question 5 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which reads as follows: Now I am going to read to you a list of indoor recreation facilities. Please tell me if you think new or additional facilities of this type are needed on Grosse Ile by answering YES or NO. - 112 - �TABLE 19 NEEDED INDOOR RECREATION FACILITIES BASFJ> OH AGE OOKPOSITIOH OF HOUSEHOLDS Age Categori ........ w I 60 or Older Up to 12 13-19 20-29 30-39 40-59 -- Multi-purpose recreation center Senior citizen center Meeting rooms An exercise and fitness center 59.8% 59.8 35.5 52.3 65.8% 63.1 36.9 51.4 49.4% 63.3 44.3 46.8 63.9% 63.0 35.2 48 .1 54. 1i. 57.9 37.3 43.1 40.0% 51.l 32.2 33.3 Banquet facilities An indoor swimming pool Racquetball courts Basketball courts 29.0 77 .6 46.7 32.7 29.7 72 .1 45.0 35.1 27.8 63.3 46.8 26.6 26.9 71.3 44.4 27.8 27.3 62.7 37.8 25.4 27.8 48.9 25.6 17.8 Volleyball courts Bowling facilities A visual and performing arts center 36.4 23.4 43.0 38.7 20.7 39.6 30.4 20.3 41.8 30.6 21.3 41.7 26.8 11.5 36.4 21.l 18.9 23.3 This table indicates the percentage of households containing aeabers in the age categories listed which indicated that the indoor recreation facilities listed are needed. �TABLE 20 NEEDED INDOOR. RECREATION FACILITIES BASED ON ANNUAL INCOME OF HOOSmOLDS Ii:- Less than $30,000 $30,000$49,999 Multi-purpose recreation center Senior citizen center Meeting rooms An exercise and fitness center 44.4% 61.1 38.9 33.3 46.9% 46.9 36.7 40.8 Banquet facilities An indoor swimming pool Racquetball courts Basketball courts 44.4 61.1 50.0 38.9 Volleyball courts Bowling facilities A visual and performing arts center 38.9 33.3 27.8 Annual Income $50,000$69,999 $70,000$99,999 $100,000 or More 71.1% 68.9 46.1 43.4 77 .8% 80.6 47.2 63.9 64.7% 64.7 50.0 67.6 26.5 69.4 32.7 22.4 35.5 65.8 36. 8 26.3 27.8 77 .8 55.6 50.0 41.2 73.5 52.9 29.4 28.6 16.3 28.6 28.9 15.8 40.8 50.0 13.9 58.3 32.4 14.7 50.0 This table indicates the percentage of households in each incoae category which indicated that the indoor recreation facilities listed are needed. �A majority of respondents in this income category perceive the need for all of the indoor recreation facilities listed except bowling facilities, banquet facilities, and meeting rooms. The lowest income categories generally recorded the lowest level of need for indoor recreation facilities. However, a majority of households with an annual income of less than $30,000 did cite the need for a senior citizen center, an indoor swimming pool, and racquetball courts. Compared t o other income categories, the perceived need for banquet facilities and bowling facilities was strongest among households with an annual income of less than $30,000. Favorite Sumter and Vinter Leisure-Ti■e Activities Respondents to the survey were asked a number of questions which were designed to ascertain residents' leisure-time interests. Two of these questions were "open-ended." In other words, respondents were free to mention any summer or winter activities that members of their household engage in; they did not have to respond in accordance with pre-determined survey categories, nor did they have to relate their response to prospective programs or facilities. In the first open-ended question, respondents were asked to indicate the three summer leisure-time activities which are most important to members of their household. As might be expected for an · island community, boating and sailing was cited most often as a favorite summer leisure activity (see Table 21). Other popular summer activities are swimming, golf, bicycling, and tennis. Rounding out the list of top ten favorite activities are walking, fishing, baseball and softball, no activity, and camping. The favor! te summer leisure ac ti vi ties have been shaped by the opportunities on the island. Water is the island's most prominent natural resource, so water-oriented activities are common. Existing recreation facilities provide for a number of other favor! te summer activities, including golf, tennis and baseball. Because of the lack of facilities, certain summer recreation activities that are common in other communities were not cited among the top ten leisure activities on Grosse Ile. Examples of such activities include picnicking, playground use, park use, and similar family-oriented activities. It is interesting that nature study and hiking were not cited more frequently, since these activities seem well-suited for the island environment. In the second open-ended question, respondents were asked to indicate the three winter leisure-time activities which are most important to members of their household. Cross country and downhill skiing were cited as the most favorite winter leisure activities by respondents (see Table 22). Interestingly, "nothing" was the third most frequently cited winter leisure - 115 - �TABLE 21 FAVORITE SUMMER LEISURE ACTIVITIES Boating, Sailing Swimming Golf Bicycling Tennis Walking Fishing Baseball, Softball Nothing Camping 20.69% 17.90% u.on: 11.07% 6.60% 5.26% 4.36% 3.91% 2.80% 2.35% Picnicking Other, Gardening Jogging, Running Hiking Horseback Riding Playground Use Basketball Aerobics Water Skiing Bowling 2.01% 1.23% 0.78% 0.56% 0.45% 0.34% 0.34% 0.22% Hunting Motor Cycling, 3-Wheeling Nature Study Racquetball Badminton Football Hockey Outdoot Festivals Park Use Soccer 0.22% 0.22% 0.22% 0.22% 0.11% 0.11% 0.11% 0.11% 0.11% 0.11% 2.35% 2 .13% This table is based on response to question 11 of Recreation Services, which reads as follows: the Survey of Please tell me, in order of importance, the three summer leisure-time activities which are most important to members of your household. Glll3 - 116 - �TABLE 22 FAVORITE WINTER LEISURE ACTIVITIES Cross Country Skiing Downhill Skiing Nothing Ice Skating Walking Bowling Tennis Sledding, Toboganning Exercise, Aerobics Fishing, Ice Fishing 16.74% 14.33% 13.19% 10.50% 6.52% 5.39% 4.96% 4.68% 3.97% 2.27% Indoor Activity Racquetball Snowmobiling Swimming Basketball Jogging, Running Hunting Arts and Crafts Hiking Movies 2.13% 1.99% 1.99% 1.99% 1.70% 1.70% 1.56% 1.28% 0.71% Hockey Horseback Riding Senior Activities Volleyball Nature Study Soccer Weight Lifting 0.43% 0.28% 0.28% 0.28% 0.14% 0.14% 0.14% o. 71% This table is based on response to question 12 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which reads as follows: Please tell me, in order of importance, the three winter leisure-time activities which are most important to members of your household. GI114 - 117 - �activity. Rounding out the top ten favorite winter leisure activities are ice skating, walking, bowling, tennis, sledding and toboganning, exercise and aerobics, and fishing. Outdoor winter activities are activities cited by respondents. It than outdoor winter activity. In winter activities require off-island predominant in the list of winter leisure appears that indoor activity is less common contrast with the summer activities, many travel. Apparently, many residents choose to do nothing, rather than participate in outdoor recreation opportunities. The frequency with which "nothing" was cited as a favorite activity may also indicate that winter recreation opportunities may be lacking on the island. Recreation Equipaent Owned by the Respondents Respondents to the survey were asked what types of recreation equipment they or members of their household own. This information provides another measure of people's leisure-time interests. This information also is of benefit in determining where recreation funds can best be spent: In some instances, knowledge about the types of recreation equipment owned by residents may indicate the need for complementary public recreation facilities. For example, the finding that over ninety percent of all households have bicycles indicates that installation of bicycle pathways would be worthwhile. In some instances, knowledge about the types of recreation equipment owned by residents may indicate that public fundings is not required. For example, over seventy percent of all households have exercise equipment. Therefore, exercise equipment may not be a worthwhile component in a recreation center. As noted, over ninety percent of all households have bicycles 23). Over eighty percent of all households have photographic Between two-thirds and three-quarters of all households have exercise golf clubs, and musical instruments. Forty to fifty percent of all have a personal computer and a power boat. (see Table equipment. equipment, households Recreation equipment that is not commonly found in Grosse Ile households includes tennis courts, horses, swimming pools, scuba gear, and sailboats. Less than about fifteen percent of all households have these types of recreation equipment. Use of Off-Island and Private Recreation Facilities Respondents to the survey were asked three questions which were designed - 118 - �TABLE 23 RECREATION EQUIPMENT OWNED BY RESPONDENTS 9.7% A swimming pool A tennis court A power boat A sailboat 40.6 15.4 Bicycles Golf clubs A boat dock Exercise equipment 90.3 70.9 28.9 72.3 A personal computer A horse Musical information Photographic equipment 40.9 3.7 66.9 82.9 A telescope Scuba gear Cross-country skiing e~uipment Downhill skiing equipment 27.1 14.0 36.6 38.9 1.1 This table indicates the percentage of respondents who indicated that they or members of their household own the equipment listed. Based on question 6 of the Survey of Recreation Services vbich reads as follows: Next I would like to find out what types of recreation equipment are owned by you or members of your household. Please tell me if you own any of the following types of equipment by responding YES OR NO. - 119 - �to ascertain the frequency of use of various off-island and private recreation facilities. The questions focused on regional park facilities (such as the Metroparks, Elizabeth Park, or Sterling State Park), facilities operated by neighboring communities ( such as Kennedy Ice Arena, Carlson Swimming Pool, or the YMCA), and private recreation facilities (such as private golf and country clubs, private yacht clubs, or private health clubs). This information provides another measure of people's leisure-time interests. It also indicates what residents currently do to satis f y their leisure-time interests. This information can be of benefit in determining where recreation funds can best be spent. For example, the widespread use of private recreational facilities indicates that the private sector is satisfactorily addressing certain recreation needs of residents. The most prudent use of public recreation funds would probably avoid duplication of the services already provided by the private sector. Knowledge of residents' use of off-island recreation facilities is beneficial in determining the number of users that could be expected if the Township were to establish similar facilities. In the question about use of regional park facilities, about fifteen percent of the respondents indicated that they or members of their household used such facilities up to 3 times per month (see Table 24). Another 15 percent indicated they used the facilities about once a month, and about 32 percent indicated they use the regional facilities less than once per month. Facilities operated by neighboring communities are used by fewer households, but on a more frequent basis, compared to use of the regional facilities. Whereas about 37 percent of the respondents indicated they never use regional facilities, a higher proportion -- over 53 percent -- indicated they never use recreation facilities operated by neighboring communities. Nevertheless, almost 18 percent of the respondents indicated they use the facilities in neighboring communities up to 3 times per month, and about nine percent indicated they use the facilities about once a month. Almost twenty percent indicated they use the facilities operated by neighboring communities less than once a month. As would be expected, households with children use off-island recreation facilities most often. A quarter of the households with young children use regional facilities up to 3 times per month, and about twenty-percent of the households with teens use regional facilities up to 3 times per month. Almost 32 percent of the households with young children use recreation facilities in neighboring communities up to 3 times per month, and over twenty-three percent of the households with teens use these facilities up to 3 times per month. The frequency of use of off-island recreation facilities is lowest in households composed of residents over the age of sixty. Response to the question about use - 120 - of private recreation facilities �TABLE 24 USE OF OFF-ISLAND RECREATION FACILITIES Use of Regional Park Facilities 4 or more times per month Up to 3 times per month About once a month Less than once a month Never 6.6% 8.6 15.4 32.3 37.1 Use of Facilities in Neighboring Communities 4 or more times per month Up to 3 times per month About once a month Less than once a month Never 11.4 6.3 9.1 19.7 53.4 Based on questions 7 and 8 of the Survey of Recreation Services, which read as follows: How many times a month do you or members of your household use regional park facilities, such as the Metroparks, Elizabeth Park, or Sterling State Park? How many times a month do you or members of your household use programs or facilities operated by neighboring communities, such as Kennedy Ice Arena, Carlson Swimming Pool, or the YMCA? - 121 - �revealed that 65.1 p~rcent of all households use these facilities. Usage is highest in households with children and teens; about seventy-three percent of these households use private recreation facilities. Usage is lowest in households with res !dents over the age of sixty; about forty-nine percent of these households use private recreation facilities. Transportation Lack of transportation does not appear to be a serious problem which prevents residents from reaching recreation facilities. The 6 percent of the respondents who indicated that transportation was a problem cited the following conditions: - Transportation is needed for children when the parents are working. - Transportation to off-island children and elderly. - Car pooling or full-time SEMTA service would be desirable. facilities is particularly difficult for Access to School Recreation Facilities As in most communities, schools are a major provider of recreation opportunities on Grosse Ile. Most schools have both indoor and outdoor recreation facilities, and many schools offer recreation program for both children and adults. In recent years, with the expansion of community education programs, school recreation facilities in many communities have been made available to a broader cross-section of the population. One question on the recreation survey was intended to determine if residents feel there is sufficient access to recreation facilities owned by the schools on Grosse Ile. The survey revealed that 46 percent of the respondents feel that access to such facilities is adequate, and 30.3 percent feel that access is not adequate. 23. 7 percent declined to respond to the question, probably because of lack of first-hand information on the subject. Although most of those who responded to the question are satisfied with access to recreation facilities, a large proportion of residents apparently believe improvements can be made. Coordination of Leisure-Time Prograas The desire to plan and offer well-organized programs to occupy the leisure time of both youth and adults is a high priority in many communities. Youth recreation programs are considered particularly important because opportunities which reduce the amount of idle time may also help to reduce juvenile crime. - 122 - �The priority afforded recreation opportunities in many communities is revealed by the existence of year round recreation departments, staffed by full-time personnel. One question on the recreation survey was intended to determine if residents feel there should be more effort to coordinate leisure-time programs by the Township. The survey revealed that 65. 7 percent of the respondents feel that a greater effort should be made, and 27.7 percent feel that a greater effort is not necessary. 6.6 percent of the respondents declined to answer this question. The response to this question reveals that most residents recognize the need for better coordination of leisure-time programs. Such coordination can be accomplished in many ways: a full-time or seasonal recreation coordinator, full-time or seasonal recreation staff, or establishment of a new Recreation Department. Desired Changes or laproveaents A final question on the recreation survey gave respondents one last opportunity to suggest any specific changes or improvements to recreation facilities on Grosse Ile which they would like to see. This question was "open-ended" and respondents could list as many changes or improvements as they desired. In general, responses to this question revealed the following: There is a keen interest in providing more opportunities for children, teens, and families, by providing additional programs or by constructing facilities ( such as parks and bicycle trails) that typically are used by these residents. Residents wish to maximize the use of existing facilities, such as school facilities and the Water's Edge facility. A number of residents have special recreation interests, such as gymnastics, volleyball, and ski and hockey teams. Before establishing special interest recreation programs, the Township must determine if there is a broad base of support in the community. - 123 - �Deaographic Data The survey asked respondents three questions to determine the age composition of household members and the annual household income. As noted throughout this report, these demographic data were valuable in interpreting respondents opinions about recreation programs and facilities. The first demographic question asked respondents how many people reside in their household. The survey revealed an average of 3.27 persons . In comparison, the 1980 Census indicated an average of about 3.13 persons per household and an average of 3.41 persons per family. The age composition of households in the sample was as follows: Age Range Up to 12 13 to 19 20 to 29 30 to 39 40 to 59 Over 59 Proportion of Households with Members in Age Range 30.6 31.7 22.6 30.9 59.7 25.7 percent percent percent percent percent percent The annual income of households in the sample was as follows: Annual Incoae Less than $30,000 $50,000 $70,000 More than No Answer $30,000 $49,999 $69,999 $99,999 $99,999 Proportion of Households within lnco■e Range 5.1 14.0 21.7 10.3 9.7 39.1 percent percent percent percent percent percent It is of interest to note that most households with an annual income of less than $30,000 were composed of residents over the age of 60. This finding may explain the general lack of support for recreation programs and facilities in the lower income category, since older age groups are generally less interested in such programs and facilities. On the other hand, most children and teens were members in households with annual incomes in the $50,000 to $69,999 range. This income category exhibited s t rong support for many recreation programs and facilities. GI102 - 124 - �FIVE YE.AR ACTION PROGRAM Thirteen kinds of recreation facility and program improvements have been identified in the action plan. These include: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) Senior Citizen Facilities and Programs Youth Facilities and Programs Adult Facilities and Programs Advance Land Acquisition Program for Park and Recreation Facilities Development of a Multi-Purpose Sports Complex Development of Bicycle, Jogging, Walking, and Exercise Trails Improvement of Tennis Facilities Development of Year-around Swimming Facilities Development of Marina and Boat Launching Facilities Development of Cross Country Skiing Facilities Development and Improvement of Horseback Riding Facilities and Programs Development and Improvement of Golf, Swimming, and Marina Facilities at the Water's Edge Country Club 13) Development of an Outdoor Band Shell for Community Concerts A chart which lists these thirteen areas of facilites and program improvements along with a priority timing schedule and suggested funding sources appears on the following page. Gll08 - 125 - �FIVE YEAR ACl'ION PllOGRAII RECREATION PROGRAM COMPONENT ltECRUTION FACILITIF.S DESCRIPTION YEAR FUNDING SOURCES Develop and improve senior citizen facilities and programs Primary focus will be on an indoor recreation center for year-round use 1988 Block Grant, General Fund Develop and improve youth Youth programs need an indoor center which could be combined with senior center 1988 Slggk c~eRt, General Fund Develop and improve adult facilities and programs Adult programs could also be included in new indoor center. 1988 SJock Crest, Development of Multi-Purpose Sports Complex This facility is currently being planned by the school system and will be located at the High School 1988 Community Bonding Program Develop and improve marina and boat launch facilities Such facilities would be developed for residents of Grosse Ile only 1988 iloak C•aRt, General Fund Develop cross-country skiing facilities Such facilities could be developed on a portion of the Water's Edge Country Club property 1988 General Fund, User Fees Land acquisition program for recreation facilities A program of advance acquisition of park and recreation land for future development 1989 Department of Natural Resources Grants; i}eek fiiu :- General Fund; Donations Develop bicycling, jogging, walking, and exercise trails Such trails received high priority in the community recreation survey 1989 Department of Natural Resources Grants facilities and programs ....N °' FOi. General Fund �FIVE YF.AR. ACfION PR.OGRAlt FOB. RF.CRF.ATION FACILITIES OOHTINUED RECREATION PROGRAM COMPONENT N ...., DESCRIPTION YEAR FUNDING SOURCES BJoGk C••A~, General Fund, Department of Natural Resources Grants Develop and improve tennis facilities Improve tennis facilities are needed adjacent to schools as well as part of the proposed new community indoor recreation center 1989 Develop year-around swimming facilities A year-around swimming facility received high priority in the recreation survey, although prior pool proposals have been defeated 1990 Community Bonding Program Improve golf, swimming, and marina facilities at Water's Edge Country Club These improvements should be part of a continuous upgrading program of this major community recreation facility 1991 General Fund, User Fees Develop outdoor Band Shell This facility could be located near the High School Campus and would serve as a center for summer concerts and festivals 1991 Community Bonding Program or donation. Develop and improve horseback riding facilities Improved stables, horse training facilities and a polo grounds should be considered 1992 Such a facility could be privately operated. GI109 ·- �DESCRIPTION OF PLANNING PROCESS Both the Planning Commission and Recreation Commission participated in development of the recreation plan. The recreation planning process was based on an in-depth survey of recreation and leisure-time needs and preferences among residents of Grosse Ile . Both commissions participated in the design of the survey questionnaire and in the interpretation of survey results. The planning consultant drafted a statement of preliminary recreation goals whi ch were reviewed by both commissions. The Recreation Commission was asked to formulate a recommended five year schedule of recreation improvements for incorporation in the recreation component of the master plan. Recommended recreation facilities were then further reviewed by the Plan Commission to ensure that recreation land areas would be compatible with the overall proposed land use pattern for Grosse Ile Township. The planning consultant also collected and analyzed related information on ecological and environmental issues as well as pedestrian and vehicular transportation on Grosse Ile. Participants in the planning process felt that it would be more real is tic to base the community recreation plan on the actual leisure-time needs and preferences of residents of Grosse Ile than on abstract recreation standards which are taken from a textbook or a national association. This approach ensures that the plan is well focused on the life styles of Grosse Ile Township residents. ADMINISTRATIVE STROCI'ORE The Grosse Ile Recreation Commission is an advisory body to the Township Board. It is an active and creative committee which meets on a regular basis to develop new recommends tions for facilities and programs. Because Grosse Ile Township is a developing community, the township's Planning Commission is also extremely active. The Planning Commission meets at least twice monthly and has also been involved in the planning of recreation facilities for the township. Grosse Ile Township has a Recreation Department which is staffed by a professional recreation director. To minimize costs, the township encourages the participation of volunteers in the recreation program. Past experience has shown that the quality of the township recreation program has been greatly enhanced by the active participation of citizen volunteers who have a sincere interest in successfully operating the leisure-time facilities and programs of the community. The operating budget for recreation facilities and programs is adopted annually as part of the total annual budget of Grosse Ile Township. The township board has authority to adopt the final budget subject to recommendations by the Recreation Commission. The recent hiring of a professionally-qualified recreation director will ensure that recreation facilities and programs in Grosse Ile will be developd and maintained at a high level of quality in future years. GI108 - 128 - � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Wyckoff Planning and Zoning Collection Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Planning & Zoning Center (Lansing, Mich.) (Organization) Wyckoff, Mark A. Description An account of the resource Municipal master plans and zoning ordinances from across the state of Michigan, spanning from the 1960s to the early 2020s. The bulk of the collection was compiled by urban planner Mark Wyckoff over the course of his career as the founder and principal planner of the Planning and Zoning Center in Lansing, Michigan. Some additions have been made to the collection by municipalities since it was transferred to Grand Valley State University. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant Michigan Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1960/2023 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/870">Planning and Zoning Center Collection (RHC-240)</a> Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/vocab/NoC-US/1.0/">No Copyright - United States</a> Subject The topic of the resource Michigan Comprehensive plan publications Master plan reports Zoning--Michigan Zoning--Maps Maps Land use--planning Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-240 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Language A language of the resource eng Text A resource consisting primarily of words for reading. Examples include books, letters, dissertations, poems, newspapers, articles, archives of mailing lists. Note that facsimiles or images of texts are still of the genre Text. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context Grosse-Ile-Twp_Master-Plan_1989 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Gerald Luedtke and Associates, Incorporated Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1989-07-17 Title A name given to the resource Grosse Ile Township Master Plan Description An account of the resource The Grosse Ile Township Master Plan was prepared by Gerald Luedtke and Associates, Incorporated and was adopted by the Planning Commission on July 17, 1989. Subject The topic of the resource Master plan reports Grosse Ile Township (Mich.) Wayne County (Mich.) Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/870">Planning and Zoning Center Collection (RHC-240)</a> Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/vocab/NoC-US/1.0/">No Copyright - United States</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Text Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf Language A language of the resource eng Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/12f2c8d71e10d02b2c5210e370f4d1b7.jpg d3e4556f38b22ba37ea4387f78d3bc9c https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/80bf06274a6d6814ed147e8648655b04.jpg 98fc05c632a9c246ff0fd3e0369da73a Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Insel-Bücherei Series Description An account of the resource The German publishing company Insel Verlag was founded in 1899 by Anton Kippenberg in Leipzig. In its early years the firm only printed expensive, beautifully-produced volumes, until demand led to the publication of the more modest Insel-Bücherei series in 1912. Relatively inexpensive but with the same careful sense of design and typography, these smaller-format books reprinted shorter works from a variety of German, European, and world authors. The series numbers considerably more than a thousand titles and is still being issued. The Digital Collection contains the scanned covers of 140 titles held by Grand Valley State University Libraries. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1904-1987 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Seidman Rare Books Collection Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Book covers Covers (Illustration) Graphic arts Publishers and publishing Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context DC-05 Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Language A language of the resource ger Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2017-09-29 Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context DC-05_IB0126 Title A name given to the resource Grösse, Glück und Unglück in der Weltgeschichte Subject The topic of the resource Book covers Covers (Illustration) Graphic arts Publishers and publishing Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1932 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2017-09-29 Description An account of the resource Cover of Grösse, Glück und Unglück in der Weltgeschichte, by Jacob Burckhardt, published by Insel-Verlag, 1932. Insel-Bücherei Nr. 126 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Seidman Rare Books. Insel-Bücherei. Z315.I5 B83 no.126 Language A language of the resource de Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/0d8beb3d73466696a631308f592427b3.mp4 83115932a371edc4908a4e01d6d60dce https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/2d1aff1da65e8fff1635d59888000a33.pdf 09be6087f7ad651e7fc472d872b837e9 PDF Text Text Grand Valley State University Veterans History Project Tom Grosser (00:15:50) (00:14) Introduction • Born in Wayne, Michigan. • Adopted by his parents at a young age. • His father worked for Sears Roebuck in Detroit, Michigan. • His family moved to Houghton Lake, Michigan when he was five years old. • Attended a special education program at Okemos High School in Okemos, Michigan. (07:50) • Drafted right out of high school. • Was first sent to Fort Knox. • He was scared when he first arrived. • The men were polite to him. • Remembers marching quite a bit during his basic training. • After basic, was sent to Fort Custer, Colorado for two weeks. • He received orders to go to Vietnam. (10:30) Vietnam • Flew to Vietnam. • Cannot remember his first memories of Vietnam. • Does not want to talk about most of his experiences at Vietnam, because they scare him. • He was supposed to be a mechanics assistant, but was sent to DaNang. • He had to guard men who were working on a satellite dish. • He was very close to the DMZ. • Remembers being attacked, and being afraid. • The Vietnamese were fair towards him. • He cannot remember seeing any children while in Vietnam. • Lived in a tin shack while in Vietnam. • Ate Chinese food while in Vietnam, but does not eat it anymore. • Stayed in the same place the entire time he was in the service. (15:50) After the Service • Flew into Oakland, California when he arrived back in the states. • He received his discharge while Oakland. • He was supposed to fly to Detroit when he flew home, but was sent to Lansing instead. • He had to wait until his parents arrived home so he could call them and tell them that he was in Lansing. • His grandmother thought he was a ghost when he arrived home. • Worked as a custodian at Sparrow Hospital in Lansing, Michigan. � Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Veterans History Project Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grand Valley State University. History Department Description An account of the resource The Library of Congress established the Veterans History Project in 2001 to collect memories, accounts, and documents of U.S. war veterans from World War II and the Korean War, Vietnam War, and conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere, and to preserve these stories for future generations. The GVSU History Department interviews are part of this work-in-progress, and may contain videos and audio recordings, transcripts and interview outlines, and related documents and photographs. Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1914- Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Subject The topic of the resource Afghan War, 2001--Personal narratives, American Iran Hostage Crisis, 1979-1981--Personal narratives, American Korean War, 1950-1953--Personal narratives, American Michigan--History, Military Oral history Persian Gulf War, 1991--Personal narratives, American United States--History, Military United States. Air Force United States. Army United States. Navy Veterans Video recordings Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American World War, 1939-1945--Personal narratives, American Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Smither, James Boring, Frank Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-27 Language A language of the resource eng Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project interviews (RHC-27)</a> Oral History A resource containing historical information obtained in interviews with persons having firsthand knowledge. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Grosser, Tom (Interview outline and video), 2007 Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Grosser, Tom Description An account of the resource Tom Grosser served in the US Army between 1971 and 1973. He served in Vietnam and saw some combat, but is still suffering the effects of PTSD and is reluctant to talk about it. Contributor An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource Collins Sr., Charles E. (Interviewer) Collins, Carol (Interviewer) Subject The topic of the resource Oral history Veterans History Project (U.S.) United States--History, Military Michigan--History, Military Veterans United States. Army Vietnam War, 1961-1975--Personal narratives, American Video recordings Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Moving Image Text Relation A related resource Veterans History Project (U.S.) Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2007-03-26 Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GrosserT Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/455">Veterans History Project Collection, (RHC-27)</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource application/pdf video/mp4 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/c6457d699bbecd5f2152ff6348b9751c.jpg 35acd8743df4733fcb545a0f1383f2db Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Robert H. Merrill photographs Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1909/1950 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-222 Description An account of the resource Photographs, negatives, and lantern slides digitized from the papers of engineer and archaeologist Robert H. Merrill. A Grand Rapids native, Merrill held an accomplished career as a civil engineer. He founded the company Spooner & Merrill, which held offices in Grand Rapids and Chicago. From 1919-1921, Merrill lived in China, working as Assistant Principal Engineer on a reconstruction of the Grand Canal - the oldest and longest canal system in the world. Merrill became fascinated by archaeology, and among other projects, he traveled to the Uxmal Pyramids in Yucatan, Mexico, with a research expedition from Tulane University. Merrill's photo collection includes images of his travels and projects, friends and family. Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context Merrill_FilmPacks_7_008 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1937-04-05 Title A name given to the resource Grotto and Acropolis Description An account of the resource Black and white photograph of the Cumae grotto and Acropolis. Subject The topic of the resource Archaeology Archaeological sites Italy Cumae (Extinct city) Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Language A language of the resource eng Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/74659b50381adb7a033b0d436dbd9246.jpg 63763d0bba2547ea011143b13a2c462c Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Robert H. Merrill photographs Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1909/1950 Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context RHC-222 Description An account of the resource Photographs, negatives, and lantern slides digitized from the papers of engineer and archaeologist Robert H. Merrill. A Grand Rapids native, Merrill held an accomplished career as a civil engineer. He founded the company Spooner & Merrill, which held offices in Grand Rapids and Chicago. From 1919-1921, Merrill lived in China, working as Assistant Principal Engineer on a reconstruction of the Grand Canal - the oldest and longest canal system in the world. Merrill became fascinated by archaeology, and among other projects, he traveled to the Uxmal Pyramids in Yucatan, Mexico, with a research expedition from Tulane University. Merrill's photo collection includes images of his travels and projects, friends and family. Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context Merrill_EastmanAlbum_2_1909-1911_081 Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1911-08-13 Title A name given to the resource Grotto Geyser at rest Description An account of the resource Black and white photograph of the Grotto Geyser at rest, Yellowstone National Park. Subject The topic of the resource Yellowstone National Park Wyoming Geysers Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived Robert H. Merrill papers (RHC-222) Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource In Copyright Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Language A language of the resource eng Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Merrill, Robert H., 1881-1955 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/e627a7b6e0f6281a723f3b0f41f80fe7.jpg 71d034d1d600237d61913838c35a6097 Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Grand Valley State University Photographs Subject The topic of the resource Aerial photographs Universities and colleges Michigan Grand Rapids (Mich.) Allendale (Mich.) Building Facilities Dormitories Students Events 1960s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000s Description An account of the resource People, places, and events of Grand Valley State University from its founding in 1960 as a 4-year college in western Michigan. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource News & Information Services. University Communications Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/41">News &amp; Information Services. University Photographs. (GV012-01)</a> Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2017-03-03 Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC-NC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright - Non-Commercial Use Permitted</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Language A language of the resource eng Type The nature or genre of the resource image Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-01 Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1960s-2000s Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Local Subject Subject headings specific to a particular image collection 1960s Source <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/41">University photographs, GV012-01</a> Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-01_UAPhotos_000110 Title A name given to the resource Groundbreaking ceremony officials Description An account of the resource L. William Seidman, Michigan Governor Swainson, and President James Zumberge holding detonator at Grand Valley State College's groundbreaking ceremony, Aug. 29, 1962. Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University Michigan Allendale (Mich.) Swainson, John B. (John Burley), 1925-1994 Zumberge, James Herbert Seidman, L. William Universities and colleges College administrators Events College presidents Governors Ground breaking ceremonies Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC-NC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright - Non-Commercial Use Permitted</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1962 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives black and white photo https://digitalcollections.library.gvsu.edu/files/original/9ff89e2cf64cb48b83eb1a83e87c59bb.jpg 70a2ebc06abab82f826c42e67745e25c Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Title A name given to the resource Grand Valley State University Photographs Subject The topic of the resource Aerial photographs Universities and colleges Michigan Grand Rapids (Mich.) Allendale (Mich.) Building Facilities Dormitories Students Events 1960s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000s Description An account of the resource People, places, and events of Grand Valley State University from its founding in 1960 as a 4-year college in western Michigan. Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource News & Information Services. University Communications Source A related resource from which the described resource is derived <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/41">News &amp; Information Services. University Photographs. (GV012-01)</a> Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Special Collections & University Archives. Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 2017-03-03 Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC-NC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright - Non-Commercial Use Permitted</a> Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpg Language A language of the resource eng Type The nature or genre of the resource image Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-01 Coverage The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant 1960s-2000s Still Image A static visual representation. Examples include paintings, drawings, graphic designs, plans and maps. Recommended best practice is to assign the type Text to images of textual materials. Local Subject Subject headings specific to a particular image collection 1960s Source <a href="https://gvsu.lyrasistechnology.org/repositories/2/resources/41">University photographs, GV012-01</a> Dublin Core The Dublin Core metadata element set is common to all Omeka records, including items, files, and collections. For more information see, http://dublincore.org/documents/dces/. Identifier An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context GV012-01_UAPhotos_000030 Title A name given to the resource Groundbreaking ceremony on the Allendale campus Creator An entity primarily responsible for making the resource Colorama Description An account of the resource Michigan Governor Swainson on the speaker's platform with President Zumberge and L. William Seidman at Grand Valley State College's groundbreaking ceremony, Aug. 28, 1962. Subject The topic of the resource Grand Valley State University Michigan Allendale (Mich.) Swainson, John B. (John Burley), 1925-1994 Zumberge, James Herbert Seidman, L. William Universities and colleges College administrators Events College presidents Governors Ground breaking ceremonies Language A language of the resource eng Rights Information about rights held in and over the resource <a href="http://rightsstatements.org/page/InC-NC/1.0/?language=en">In Copyright - Non-Commercial Use Permitted</a> Type The nature or genre of the resource Image Format The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource image/jpeg Date A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource 1962 Publisher An entity responsible for making the resource available Grand Valley State University. University Libraries. Lemmen Library and Archives black and white photo